Fostex Musical Instrument FD 8 User Manual
Owner’s Manual  
Model  
Digital Multitracker  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
1
2
OL  
0
6
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
0
10  
10  
12  
24  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
0
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
0
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
300  
300  
300  
300  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
300  
2k  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
RECORD TRACK  
0
0
0
0
0
0
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
5/L  
6/R  
7/L  
8/R  
SCRUB  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
PREVIEW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TIME BASE  
SEL  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
INPUT  
TRK  
1
INPUT  
TRK  
2
INPUT  
TRK  
3
INPUT  
TRK  
4
INPUT  
TRK  
5
INPUT  
TRK  
6
INPUT  
TRK  
7
INPUT  
TRK  
8
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
0
10  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
EJECT  
PGM SEL  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
L
INPUT SEL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
SELECTOR  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
TRK  
1
TRK  
2
TRK  
3
TRK  
4
TRK  
5
TRK  
6
TRK  
7
TRK  
8
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
RECORD  
S
T
O
P
P
L
A
Y
REWIND/  
F
FWD/  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
H
H
M
L
M
L
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction.............................................................................4  
Main features...........................................................................4  
Precautions..................................................................................5  
StoringaLocatePoint(EditPoint)........................................67  
Storing and editing the locate points  
to the memory key..............................................67  
Storinginreal-time...........................................................67  
Editingandstoringlocatedata......................................68  
Editingandstoringdata..................................................68  
Editing the data stored in the LOCATE key..................69  
NamesandFunctions...............................................................6  
ControlPanel(Mixersection)...............................................7  
ControlPanel(Recordersection)........................................9  
Front Panel (Input/output section)................................15  
Rear Panel (Input/output section).................................15  
Display Section...................................................................17  
LocateFunction........................................................................70  
Direct Locate.......................................................................70  
Auto Play............................................................................70  
Auto Return........................................................................71  
Auto Repeat........................................................................72  
BeforeStarting..........................................................................21  
Time Base.............................................................................21  
Recording method and REMAIN indicator...................22  
Managing songs by Program Change function............23  
RealtracksandAdditionaltracks.....................................24  
Input monitoring and playback monitoring................25  
Signalflow(ThePANknobfunctionandstereobus)...26  
Audiofileandevent.............................................................27  
PreviewFunction......................................................................74  
ExecutingthePreviewfunction.........................................75  
Trimmingthesoundwhilepreviewing...........................75  
MIDISynchronization..............................................................77  
MIDI clock sync system....................................................77  
MTC sync/Machine Control system...............................79  
SYNC system in Slave mode..............................................81  
SYNCsystemwith“adat”bytheslavemode..................83  
FormattingaDisk.....................................................................28  
Recordingmode....................................................................28  
Formattingacurrentdrivedisk(SCSIdisk)....................29  
Formattingacurrentdrivedisk(2.5inchharddisk)...31  
Formattingabackupdisk(SCSIdisk)...............................31  
Formattingabackupdisk(fixedharddisk)...................32  
SavingandLoadingSongData.............................................85  
Outlineofthesave/loadoperation..................................85  
Saving and loading data using a SCSI drive  
asthecurrentdrive......................................................87  
Saving and loading data using an 2.5 inch  
HandlingPrograms..................................................................33  
Creating a new Program....................................................33  
UsingaProgramChangefunction....................................34  
Deleting a Program...........................................................35  
Editing a Program title......................................................36  
internalharddiskasthecurrentdrive....................91  
ChangingtheInitialSettings(SETUPmode).....................97  
Selecting SETUP mode.....................................................97  
Setting a time signature....................................................98  
SettingaTempo.................................................................100  
SettingtheMetronomefunction....................................101  
Setting a preroll value......................................................102  
Setting MIDI sync output signal.....................................103  
Setting an MTC frame rate.............................................104  
Setting an MTC offset value...........................................104  
Setting Offset mode..........................................................105  
Setting the Slave mode....................................................106  
Setting the Slave type......................................................107  
Setting the Record Protection function........................108  
Setting digital input tracks.............................................109  
Setting digital output tracks...........................................110  
SettingBAR/BEATresolutionmode..............................111  
Setting the MIDI device number....................................112  
Checkingthenumberoftrackevents............................112  
PlaybackinVariPitchMode...................................................37  
RecordingtoaMetronomeSound.......................................38  
PunchIn/OutRecording.........................................................41  
WhatisPunchIn/Outrecording?.....................................41  
AutoPunchIn/Outrecording............................................41  
ManualPunchIn/Outrecording......................................45  
DigitalRecording......................................................................48  
Digitalrecordingfromanexternaldigitaldevice..........48  
Digitalrecordingtoanexternaldevice............................49  
Digitalmixdown....................................................................50  
Digitalandanalogsimultaneousrecording...................52  
HowtousetheRECORDERINjack......................................54  
EditingTracks...........................................................................56  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste......................................56  
Erase..................................................................................59  
Track Exchange.................................................................61  
MIDIImplementationChart...................................................114  
MMCCommandList/InquiryMessageList....................115  
Maintenance/Specifications..............................................116  
BlockDiagram......................................................................118  
Cue&ReviewFunction...........................................................63  
Cue & Review function using  
the REWIND and F FWD button............................63  
DigitalscrubbingusingSCRUBmode..............................64  
Cue&ReviewfunctionusingtheSHUTTLEfeature......65  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction/Main features/Precautions  
• The FD-8 has a “digital input track setup” function that  
enables you to input S/P DIF or adat digital signals and record  
them on any two tracks or all eight tracks.  
Introduction  
Thank you for choosing the Fostex FD-8. The FD-8 is a  
eight-trackmultitrackerequippedwithsixteenadditional  
virtual tracks. It uses a SCSI removable disk, such as a  
Zip cartridge or an MO disk, or a fixed SCSI hard disk,  
optional 2.5 inch internal hard disk as a recording media  
to perform eight-track recording and eight-track  
playback.  
• The FD-8 has a “digital output track setup” function that  
enables you to output digital data as S/P DIF or adat digital  
signals and record them on an external digital device (DAT,  
MD, adat, etc.).  
• You can also use the DATA IN/OUT jacks to mix down digital  
signals to an external DAT or adat, and to save and load song  
data (audio data and SETUP mode settings) to and from the  
DAT or adat.  
Main features  
• You can connect a backup SCSI drive to the unit for the save  
and load operation.  
Mixer section  
The FD-8 is equipped with a eight-channel analog mixer  
that achieves the high tonal quality required by state-  
of-the-art digital recording.  
• A “Digital Remix function” allows for digital output of all  
twenty sources remixed in the mixer section.  
• MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer can be transmitted  
according to the internal programmable Tempo Map.  
You can set up a synchronization system with a sequencer or  
a rhythm machine without wasting a track.  
• The mixer section features eight input channels. Inputs 1 to  
6 supports line level input and Inputs 7 and 8 support a  
wide range of input sources, from line level to mic level.  
• Inputs 7 and 8 are equipped with a microphone amplifier, a  
three-stage trim switch, and an insert jack, as well as a  
balanced XLR connector.  
• You can use the FD-8 as a sync slave machine by sending  
MTC from a connected device.  
• The FD-8 supports MTC, MMC, and Fostex System Exclusive  
Message, which allows for advanced control and high-  
precision synchronization from external sequencing software.  
You can set the device number and MTC frame rate for MMC  
and Fostex System Exclusive Message. Also, “MTC Offset  
function” and “Offset Mode function” are useful for setting  
upasyncenvironmentusinganexternalsequencingsoftware.  
• All input channels have a three-point equalizer (two channels:  
shelving, one channel: parametric), that allow for a sharp  
and high-responsive tone adjustment.  
• Two AUX sends and returns allows for flexible sound  
processing. You can connect two ambient-type signal  
processors with stereo outputs.  
• Auto Punch In/Out and Manual Punch In/Out functions offer  
two modes: “Take” for a real recording, and “Rehearsal” for  
monitoring the part between the in and out points.  
• The mixer section also features an “All Stereo Mix function”  
that facilitates producing a stereo masterpiece and allows  
you to master all sources in stereo, including synchronizing  
MIDI sound sources.  
• The “Program Select function” enables you to select a song  
from up to 99 songs and name the songs.  
Recorder section  
• Recorder In jacks (L/R) are used to record audio directly to  
the recorder section, bypassing the mixer section.  
TheFD-8’srecordersectionusesarecordingformatcalled  
FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3). It uses an  
external SCSI device (stationary disk or removable disk)  
as the recording media.  
• A “Bar/Beat Resolution function” is used to edit audio at the  
beginning of the beat (round up or round off to a beat).  
• The “Metronome function” can be used as a rhythm guide  
for recording.  
• The FD-8 features non-destructive audio editing (a great  
advantage of digital recording) such as Copy & Paste, Move  
& Paste, Erase, etc. You can choose Time Base (ABS or MTC)  
or MIDI bar/beat/clock as the unit.  
• Various edit functions using an edit point (locate point), such  
as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, Auto Punch In/Out,  
Auto Locate, are available. You can also locate ABS 0 or REC  
END regardless of the edit point (locate point).  
• Two recording modes: Normal mode, Mastering mode, to  
support various recording media.  
• You can set a preroll time of 0 to 10 seconds.  
• A “Preview function” allows for an intuitive fine-adjustment  
of an editing point (locate point).  
• A “Disk Remain Display function” offers a clear indication  
of available recording time and disk space (in mono track  
recording). You can choose the Time Base from ABS, MTC,  
and BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
• An “Undo/Redo function” enables you to easily correct  
recording and editing mistakes.  
• A “Vari Pitch function” allows you to fine-tune the pitch.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction/Main features/Precautions  
• If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low  
temperature to a warm place, or if you use the unit in a room  
in which the temperature varies significantly during winter,  
condensation may occur on the hard disk or other parts. In  
such cases, leave the unit for about an hour in the new location  
before you turn on the power.  
Precautions  
• Be sure to connect the FD-8 to the power supply specified in  
the Specifications section of this Owner’s Manual. Do not  
use an AC outlet of any other voltage.  
• Do not connect the FD-8 to the same AC outlet to which  
devices that could generate noise (such as a large motor or  
dimmer), or the devices that consume a large amount of  
power (such as an air conditioning system or large electric  
heater) are connected.  
Note on repair  
• This unit does not use any parts that users can repair easily.  
Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station to  
ask about repairs.  
• If you use the unit in an area with a different power voltage,  
first consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station.  
You can use the unit with a power frequency of 50Hz or  
60Hz.  
• Use the packing carton designed for the FD-8 when you  
transport the unit to the dealer for repair or return.  
If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack the unit  
completely using shock absorbing materials. Fostex is not  
responsible for malfunction or damage due to incomplete  
packaging or caused during transport.  
• It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or  
damage. In such a case, stop using the unit immediately and  
ask your dealer to repair the cord.  
• To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the FD-8,  
avoid contact with water or other liquids, or do not handle  
the power plug while your hands are wet.  
About copyrights  
• It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording or  
video images or audio data for which copyright is possessed  
by a third party for commercial purposes such as contents,  
broadcasts, sales, or distribution- any purpose other than  
for your personal pleasure.  
• To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the FD-8,  
do not remove the main unit cover or reach the inside the  
unit.  
• Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects such as  
pins, accidentally enter the inside of the unit because this  
may lead to electric shock or damage. Should water enter  
the inside of the unit, remove the power plug from the AC  
outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service  
station.  
About damage  
• FOSTEX is not responsible for any “direct damage” or  
“indirect damage” caused by using the FD-8.  
• To prevent damage to the FD-8, be sure to power on the  
connected devices first, then turn on the power to the FD-8.  
When you remove or connect the cables to the input/output  
connectors on the FD-8, make sure that the channel INPUT  
faders and volume controls are set “0.”  
• Before turning the power off to the FD-8, first quit Setup  
mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped.  
Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the unit  
while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED is  
lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will you lose recorded  
data, but you may damage to the unit.  
FOSTEX is not responsible for the data lost during operation  
of the unit.  
• Before you change the location of the FD-8, pack the unit in  
the shipping carton or an impact-resistant case.  
Make sure that the unit is kept free from external vibration  
or impact since the unit is very sensitive to vibration.  
• Do not install the unit in locations subject to the following:  
* Extremely high or low temperature, or significant changes  
in temperature.  
* Excessive humidity or dust.  
* Excessive changes in power supply voltage  
* Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking surfaces.  
* Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or speaker).  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Names and Functions  
Rear panel  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
Control panel  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
1
2
OL  
0
6
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
0
10  
10  
12  
24  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
GAIN  
0
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
0
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
SHIFT  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
300  
300  
300  
300  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
300  
2k  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
+
200  
RECORD TRACK  
0
0
0
0
0
0
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
5/L  
6/R  
7/L  
8/R  
SCRUB  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
+
-
+
-
+
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
PREVIEW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TIME BASE  
SEL  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
INPUT  
TRK  
1
INPUT  
TRK  
2
INPUT  
TRK  
3
INPUT  
TRK  
4
INPUT  
TRK  
5
INPUT  
TRK  
6
INPUT  
TRK  
7
INPUT  
TRK  
8
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
0
10  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
EJECT  
PGM SEL  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
L
INPUT SEL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
SELECTOR  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
TRK  
1
TRK  
2
TRK  
3
TRK  
4
TRK  
5
TRK  
6
TRK  
7
TRK  
8
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
RECORD  
S
T
O
P
P
L
A
Y
REWIND/  
F
FWD/  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
H
H
M
L
M
L
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Control Panel (Mixer Section)  
Letters in brackets ([ ]) are labels on the panel.  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX  
AUX RTN  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
AUX1  
HIGH  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
HIGH  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
AUX1  
HIGH  
AUX2  
AUX1  
AUX2  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
1
2
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
-
-
+
+
0
10  
10  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
MID  
MID  
MID  
GAIN  
MID  
0
0
0
900  
0
0
900  
0
0
0
0
0
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
GAIN  
8
0
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
MID  
MID  
MID  
SHIFT  
MID  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
900  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
300  
300  
300  
300  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
2k  
5k  
300  
2k  
5k  
2k  
300  
2k  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
200  
200  
200  
5k  
200  
0
0
0
0
0
0
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON  
MON SECTION  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
INPUT  
TRK  
1
INPUT  
TRK  
2
INPUT  
TRK  
3
INPUT  
TRK  
4
INPUT  
TRK  
5
INPUT  
TRK  
6
INPUT  
TRK  
7
INPUT  
TRK  
8
MASTER  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
9
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
MON  
L
MON  
R
0
10  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
L
INPUT SEL  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
INPUT SEL  
SELECTOR  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT SEL  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
INPUT  
OFF  
L/R  
L/R+MON  
MON  
10  
TRK  
1
TRK  
2
TRK  
3
TRK  
4
TRK  
5
TRK  
6
TRK  
7
TRK  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L/R  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
H
H
M
L
11  
M
L
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
12  
1. Input faders [1-8]  
During recording, you can use them to pan channel signals of the  
sound sources connected to the INPUT jacks to Tracks 1-8 .  
Turn the knobs all the way to L or R. If you turn the knob to L, the  
corresponding channel signal is recorded to Tracks 1 , 3 , 5 and 7.  
If you turn the knob to R, the corresponding channel signal is  
recorded to Tracks 2 , 4, 6 and 8.  
These faders allow you to control the input level of signals  
selected via the INPUT SEL switch [2] (that is, the input  
signals from the INPUT jacks or the recorder output signals).  
Nominal level is obtained at fader position of 7-8, and the  
fader achieves approximately 6dB of gain at the 10 position.  
1
For mixdown, use these knobs to determine the stereo image of  
the playback sound of Tracks 1-8. Turn the knobs to the desired  
position.  
2. Input select switches [INPUT SEL (INPUT/OFF/TRK)]  
These switches allow you to select signals to be routed to  
the input faders. The following options are available:  
2
4. Monitor panpot knobs [PAN (MON L/MON R)]  
These knobs allow you to adjust the balance of the signals  
that were level-adjusted for the level via the MON knob [5]  
before you send them to the monitor section L and R. The  
following options are available.  
“INPUT”  
Signals from instruments and microphones connected  
to the INPUT jacks are routed to the channel faders.  
“OFF”  
“TRK”  
The switch is turned off. No signals are routed.  
Recorder output signals (TRK 1-8) are routed to the  
channel faders, withTrack 1 output routed to Channel 1,  
Track 2 routed to channel 2, etc.  
“MON L” The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent only to  
monitor section “L.”  
“Center” The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent to both  
monitor section “R” and “L” at the same level.  
3. Panpot knobs [PAN (L/R)]  
“MON R” The signal routed to the MON knob will be sent only to  
Panpot knobs have the following two functions:  
monitor section “R.”  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
5. Monitor level control knob [MON (INPUT/TRK)]  
These knobs are used to select signals sent to monitor  
sections L and R, and to adjust the level of those signals.  
The following options are available.  
8. AUX return knobs [AUX RTN (1, 2)]  
These knobs allow you to adjust the input level of processed  
signals from a connected external effect unit.  
AUX RTN 1 These knobs enable you to adjust the input level of  
processedsignalsfromanexternaleffectunitconnected  
to theAUX RTN jack 1. The level of both signals input to  
AUX RTN 1 L/MONO and R will be adjusted equally.  
“TRK”  
The recorder output signals are sent to the monitor  
section. As you turn the knob to the right, the signal  
level becomes higher.  
AUX RTN 2 These knobs enable you to adjust the input level of  
processedsignalsfromanexternaleffectunitconnected  
to theAUX RTN jack 2. The level of both signals input to  
AUX RTN 2 L/MONO and R will be adjusted equally.  
“0”  
No signals are sent.  
“INPUT”  
Pre-fader signals* from the INPUT jacks are sent to the  
monitor section.As you turn the knob to the left, the signal  
level becomes higher.  
9. Monitormasterknob[MONITORSECTION(MASTER)]  
This knob allows you to adjust the final level of monitoring  
signals, thatis, theheadphonevolumeandthelevelofsignals  
output from the MON OUT L/R jacks.  
* Pre-fader signal: Input signals before reaching the input faders  
6. Equalizer control knobs [EQ (HIGH/MID/LOW)]  
These knobs are used to adjust tonal quality of the signals  
routed to the channel faders. The following settings are  
available.  
10. Monitor select switch  
[SELECTOR (L/R, L/R+MON, MON)]  
This switch allows you to select a signal to be routed to the  
MON OUT L/R and PHONES jacks. The following options  
are available.  
“HIGH”  
Signals with a frequency of 12kHz will be boosted/cut up  
to +/-15dB.  
“MID GAIN” The frequency range selected via the MID SHIFT knob  
“L/R”  
This selects signals output from the STEREO OUT L/R  
jacks (stereo bus L/R signals).  
(200Hz-5kHz) will be boosted/cut up to +/-15dB.  
“MID SHIFT” Use this setting to select a frequency range to boost or  
cut using the MID GAIN knob. You can set the frequency  
in the range of 200Hz-5kHz.  
“L/R+MON” This selects both signals output from the STEREO OUT  
L/R jacks and signals routed to channel monitor buses  
L/R.  
“LOW”  
Signals with a frequency of 80Hz will be boosted/cut up  
to +/-15dB.  
“MON”  
This selects signals routed to channel monitor buses L/  
R.  
11. Master fader [L/R]  
The master fader allows you to adjust the level of signals  
output from the STEREO OUT L/R jacks (stereo bus L/R  
output signal). The fader setting will affect the level of  
recorder input signals.  
+15dB  
-15dB  
12. Input level switches [LEVEL (H/M/L)]  
Set these switches to appropriate positions according to the  
output level of the devices connected to input jacks 7 and 8  
(the phone jacks on the front panel or the XLR connector  
on the rear panel).  
5kHz  
12kHz  
80Hz  
200Hz  
7. AUX send knobs [AUX (AUX 1/AUX 2)]  
Connect a microphone or other low-output device to input  
jacks 7 and 8 (on the front panel or rear panel) that have  
the input level switch. Refer to the example below.  
These knobs are used to select whether the channel fader  
signals are output from the AUX SEND 1 jack or AUX SEND  
2 jack, and to adjust the level of those signals. That is, the  
signals selected and adjusted via these knobs will be sent  
from the AUX SEND jack 1 or 2 to an external device, such  
as an effect unit.  
<Example>  
“L (-50dB)” Set the switch to this position when you connect  
a microphone.  
“M (-30dB)” Set the switch to this position when you connect  
a single-coil or humbucking type electric guitar or  
bass.  
“AUX 1”  
Signals are sent to theAUX SEND jack 1.Turning the knob  
to the left will increase the output level.  
“0”  
No signals are sent.  
“H (-10dB)” Set the switch to this position when you connect  
“AUX 2”  
Signals are sent to theAUX SEND jack 2.Turning the knob  
to the right will increase the output level.  
a keyboard or drum machine.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Control Panel (Recorder Section)  
Letters in brackets ([ ]) are labels on the panel.  
14  
15  
13  
OL  
0
40  
16  
6
12  
24  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
17  
39  
RECORD TRACK  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
5/L  
6/R  
7/L  
8/R  
SCRUB  
18  
19  
PREVIEW  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
20  
21  
22  
42  
23  
37  
33  
34  
EJECT  
PGM SEL  
VARI  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
PITCH  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
LOCATE ABS  
LOCATE REC END  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
0
RECORD  
S
T
O
P
P
L
A
Y
REWIND/  
F
FWD/  
29  
30  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
41  
38  
28  
32  
31 26  
24 35  
27  
25  
14. LCD  
36  
13. Record track select keys  
The LCD indicates signal levels and various settings.  
[RECORD TRACK (1/L, 2/R, 3/L, 4/R, 5/L, 6/R, 7/L, 8/R)]  
These keys enable you to select “SAFE” or “READY” for a  
recording track. Pressing the key once will cause the  
corresponding track to enter READY mode, and the LED of  
the key you pressed to flash. Pressing the key again will  
cause the corresponding track to enter “SAFE” mode, and  
the LED to turn off. When you start recording on a track in  
READY mode, the flashing LED remains lit.  
If you press only the RECORD button with a track in READY  
mode, you can monitor the signal input to the READY track  
so that you can adjust the recording level. To cancel this  
input monitoring status, press the RECORD button again.  
(This causes the FD-8 to enter playback monitoring mode.)  
You can also use these select keys to select tracks to edit for  
Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, etc.  
Refer to “Display Section” on page 17 for more information  
on the display.  
15. Contrast adjustment knob  
Use this knob to adjust the contrast of the LCD. Turning  
this knob clockwise will increase the contrast, and turning  
it counter-clockwise will decrease the contrast.  
Note: The display is not illegible if you leave the knob  
counter-clockwise all the way.  
Note: You can record on Real tracks 1–8 in real-time, but  
not on Additional tracks 9–24. If you are using an MO drive  
as the current drive, you can record only two tracks  
simultaneously. If you try to record more than two tracks by  
setting them to READY mode, [track Over !] appears and  
READY mode will be cancelled.  
16. Scrub key [SCRUB]  
Pressing this key causes its LED to light up as the FD-8 enters  
Digital Scrub mode. At this point, press the desired RECORD  
RACK select key to digitally scrub the selected track playback  
using the JOG dial.  
Refer to page 25 for more information on playback monitoring  
and input monitoring.  
Refertopage64formoreinformationonDigitalScrubmode.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
17. Display indication select key [DISP SEL]  
Pressing this key each time will change the display indication  
as follows:  
22. Access LED [ACCESS]  
This LED lights up or flashes when data is being written to  
or read from an external SCSI current drive disk, or optional  
2.5-inch internal hard disk.  
Currently-selected Time Base indication *1  
Currently-selected Time Base REMAIN indication *2  
External MTC IN indication *3  
Note: Do not turn off the power to the unit when this LED  
lights up or flashes. Otherwise you may lose data on the  
hard disk connected to the unit.  
23. JOG dial [JOG/ SHUTTLE ]  
When the FD-8 is stopped, use the JOG dial to perform a jog  
operation (forward or reverse) for audio scrubbing without  
pitch change. You can also use this dial to increase and  
decrease the numeric values or input alphabetical characters  
in edit mode.  
*1 The current position in terms of Time Base selected via the TIME  
BASE SEL key appears. ABS time, MTC time, or BAR/BEAT/CLK is  
used.  
Rotating the JOG dial while holding down the SHIFT key  
will enable you to perform the shuttle operation with  
different speeds ranging from normal speed to 64-times  
speed.  
*2Available recording time and space on the current SCSI disk appears.  
Time indication uses the currently-selected Time Base (ABS, MTC, or  
BAR/BEAT/CLK). The space indication uses MB (Megabyte). (The  
values are based on mono track recording.)  
*3 MTC being input from an external MIDI device to the FD-8 appears.  
Refer to page 63 for more information on the cue/review  
function and the shuttle function.  
If no MTC is input, the display shows “00H 00M 00S 00F.”  
18. Setup key [SETUP]  
24. Fast forward button [F FWD]  
Press this key to set the FD-8 in SETUP mode to execute  
various menus. This key works only when the FD-8 is  
stopped.  
Pressing this button while the FD-8 is stopped will start fast  
forwarding at low speed at first, then gradually accelerate  
to 30-times speed. If you press this button while the FD-8 is  
playing, cueing (fast forwarding with sound) starts at three-  
time speed. Pressing this button while holding down the  
STOP button will activate the “LOCATE REC END” operation,  
which will locate the end point of the recording on the Real  
track in the current Program. You can also use this button  
to locate an edit point in edit mode.  
Refer to page 97 for more information on SETUP mode.  
19. Time Base select key [TIME BASE SEL]  
Pressing this key repeatedly will switch Time Base as follows:  
Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 66 for more  
information on the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation.  
ABS time  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
MTC time  
25. Rewind button [REWIND]  
Pressing this button while the FD-8 is stopped will start  
rewinding at low speed at first, then gradually increase the  
speed up to 30-times speed. If you press this button while  
the FD-8 is playing, cueing (rewinding with sound) starts at  
three-times speed. Pressing this button while holding down  
the STOP button will activate the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation,  
which will locate the beginning of the current Program (ABS  
time: 00m 00s 00f). You can also use this button to locate  
an edit point in edit mode.  
20. Execute/Yes key [EXECUTE/YES]  
Press this key to confirm the edit operations, such as Copy  
& Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase, and to set the parameters  
of SETUP menus.  
21. Exit/No key [EXIT/NO/ EJECT ]  
Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 66 for more  
information on the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation.  
This key is the counterpart of the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Press this key to cancel an operation. When you use a  
removable SCSI disk, pressing this key while holding down  
the SHIFT key will eject the disk.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
26. Play button [PLAY]  
* Refer to page 70 for more information on these operations.  
* Refer to page 45 for more information on the Punch In/Out  
operation using a foot switch.  
Pressing this button causes the recorder section to play back.  
Pressing this button while holding down the RECORD button  
when a track is in READY mode will cause the FD-8 to start  
recording on the READY track.  
28. Record button [RECORD/ AUTO PUNCH ]  
Pressing only this button during the recording operation  
will punch-out (cancel) recording. Pressing this button while  
holding down the STOP button will cause the “CLIPBOARD  
PLAY” operation to start.  
Pressing the PLAY button while holding down this button  
will cause the FD-8 to start recording on any READY tracks.  
At this time, the flashing LED of the RECORD TRACK select  
key for the corresponding READY track lights up steadily,  
and the PLAY LED and the RECORD LED light up.  
* Refer to the “STOP button” section and page 57 for more  
information on the “CLIPBOARD PLAY” operation.  
If you press only the RECORD button, a READY Real track  
enters input monitoring mode (The RECORD LED flashes.).  
At this time, pressing the RECORD button again will cancel  
the input monitoring mode, and the track will return to  
playback monitoring mode.  
* Refer to page 47 for more information on the Punch Out  
operation using the PLAY button.  
27. Stop button [STOP]  
Pressing the RECORD button while holding down the SHIFT  
key will toggle between AUTO PUNCH on and off.  
Pressing this button during the playback, recording, fast  
forward, orrewindoperationwillstoptherecordertransport  
operation. Pressing this button while the FD-8 is in SETUP  
mode will cause the unit to exit SETUP mode.  
Pressing the PLAY, REWIND, or F FWD button while holding  
down the STOP button will cause the following operations  
to start.  
* Refer to page 41 for more information on AUTO PUNCH  
mode.  
* Refer to page 25 for more information on input monitoring  
and playback monitoring.  
If you wish to rehearse the Manual Punch In/Out operation  
using the foot switch, press the foot switch while holding  
down this button to enter Rehearsal mode.  
29. Shift key [ SHIFT ]  
Press a key, button, or turn the dial while holding down the  
SHIFTkeytoactivatethefollowing“shift-invoked”functions.  
PLAY  
“CLIPBOARD PLAY” operation starts. (See  
below.) . During the operation, the STOP  
LED flashes and the PLAY LED lights up.  
You can audition the data at edit points  
(locate points) stored in the memory  
STOP  
The removable SCSI disk is  
REWIND/  
keys. (For more information, refer to  
ejected. (Refer to “Formatting a  
“Preview function” on page 74.)  
ABS 0 is located. (See below.)  
disk” on page 29.)  
RECORD TRACK  
F FWD/  
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
5/L  
6/R  
7/L  
8/R  
SCRUB  
REC END is located. (See below.)  
PREVIEW  
TIME BASE  
SEL  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
DISP SEL  
SETUP  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
EXECUTE  
/YES  
EXIT  
/NO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
EJECT  
PGM SEL  
* CLIPBOARD PLAY operation  
VARI  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
PITCH  
LOCATE  
ACCESS  
The CLIPBOARD PLAY operation plays back data on the clipboard. (If the  
clipboard does not contain any data, the display shows [Void Data !] and  
nothing happens.). During this operation, the display indicates the type of  
the data (“Copy Clip” for copy data, and “Move Clip” for move data), and the  
duration. The indicator of the copy source or move source track flashes.  
In this way, you will know which track the currently playing data comes from  
and why the data is on the clipboard.  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
CLIPBOARD PLAY  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
RECORD  
S
T
O
P
P
L
A
Y
REWIND/  
F
FWD/  
Auto Punch mode  
is turned on and  
off. (Refer to  
“Punch In/Out” on  
page 41.)  
The SHUTTLE dial  
function is activated.  
(Refer to “JOG dial/  
* ABS 0 locate operation  
You can edit locate  
data stored in the  
LOCATE key. (Refer  
to “Storing an edit  
point (locate point)” on  
page 66 for more  
information.  
This operation locates the beginning of the current Program (ABS time:  
00m 00s 00f).  
SHUTTLE  
dial  
You can edit Vari Pitch data.  
(Refer to “Playback in Vari Pitch  
mode” on page 37 for more  
information.)  
cueing”onpage65for  
more information.)  
* REC END locate operation  
This operation locates the end of the audio recording (REC END) on the  
Real track in the current Program.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
30.Vari Pitch key [VARI PITCH/ P.EDIT ]  
32. Locate key [LOCATE/ LOC MEM ]  
This key toggles Vari Pitch mode on and off. When Vari Pitch  
mode is on, the “VARI PITCH” indicator lights up on the  
display, and the FD-8 plays using the current pitch data.  
Pressing the VARI PITCH key while holding down the SHIFT  
key will cause the FD-8 to enter edit mode, in which you can  
change pitch data in real-time.  
Use this key to locate a point. Press a key that stores locate  
points, such as the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT keys, AUTO PUNCH  
IN/OUT keys, and AUTO RTN START/END keys, then press  
the LOCATE key to locate a point stored in the  
corresponding key.  
The last locate data will replace the data stored in the  
LOCATE key. Therefore, pressing only the LOCATE key will  
locate the last locate point. If you have set Auto Play mode,  
the FD-8 will start playing from the located point.  
Pressing the LOCATE key while holding down the SHIFT  
key will cause the FD-8 to enter edit mode, in which you  
can edit data stored in the LOCATE key.  
To exit edit mode, press the EXIT/NO key.  
Refer to page 37 for more information on playing with Vari  
Pitch and editing Vari Pitch data.  
*Refertopage70formoreinformationontheLocatefunction.  
31.Auto Return/Auto Play mode on/off key  
[AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY]  
* Refer to page 69 for more information on editing data using  
the LOCATE key.  
Use this key to turn on and off Auto Return mode, Auto Play  
mode, and Auto Repeat mode. Each time you press the key,  
the mode will change and the following indication will be  
displayed.  
33. Hold/> key [HOLD/>]  
Pressing the HOLD/> key while the recorder is operating  
will cause the FD-8 to capture the time at which you pressed  
the key (or bar/beat/clock value), display it, then enter  
edit mode. (If you press the HOLD/> key while the recorder  
section is stopped, the FD-8 enters edit mode directly.)  
To cancel edit mode, press the STOP button, DISP SEL key,  
or the EXIT/NO key.  
Auto Return/Play mode is OFF.  
(No indication)  
AUTO  
Auto Play mode is ON.  
(“PLAY” lights up.)  
AUTO  
PLAY  
In edit mode, you can use this key to select a digit of the  
valuetoedit(editpoint). Youcanselectadigitwhichflashes  
on the display) in the following order.  
Auto Return mode is ON.  
(“RTN” lights up.)  
AUTO  
AUTO  
RTN  
RTN  
ABS or MTC is used as Time Base:  
Auto Repeat mode is ON.  
First, “S” (second) flashes. Each time you press the HOLD/> key,  
the flashing characters change in this order: F -> SF -> H -> M-> S.  
PLAY  
(Both “PLAY” and “RTN” light up.)  
* Auto Play mode  
BAR/BEAT/CLK is used as Time Base:  
First, “BAR” flashes. Each time you press the HOLD/> key, the  
flashing indicator changes in this order: -> CLK -> BAR.  
The FD-8 locates a point and starts playing from the locate point.  
* Auto Return mode  
When the AUTO RTN END point is reached while the recorder section is  
playing, the FD-8 automatically locates the AUTO RTN START point.  
This mode is effective only if the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO  
RTN END point have already been specified.  
IfyoupresstheHOLD/>keyandtheSTOREkeysimultaneously  
while the recorder is stopped, the FD-8 enters Program Select  
mode, in which you can select a Program or set up a new  
Program.  
Note: The Auto Return function is enabled only when the  
FD-8 is playing. While the FD-8 is recording, the FD-8 will not  
locate the START point after it reaches the AUTO RTN END  
point.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on editing memory.  
*Auto Repeat mode  
* Refer to page 33 for more information on the Program  
Select function.  
This mode is effective only whenAuto Play mode andAuto Return mode are  
turned on. The FD-8 will play the part between theAUTO RTN START point  
and the AUTO RTN END point repeatedly. This mode is also effective only if  
the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point have already  
been specified.  
Refer to page 70 for more information on each mode.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
34. Store key [STORE]  
36. Edit key [EDIT]  
This key is used to store time values (or bar/beat/clock  
values) in the memory keys. Press this key, then one of the  
following keys to store data indicated on the display  
(including edit data) in the corresponding memory key. If  
you press the STORE key and the HOLD/> key  
simultaneouslywhiletherecorderisstopped, theFD-8enters  
Program Select mode, in which you can select a Program or  
set up a new Program.  
Pressing this key causes the FD-8 to enter menu selection  
mode for editing tracks, and displays the title of the menu  
you used last time. Press this key repeatedly or turn the  
JOG dial to select a menu. The edit menus appear in the  
following order. To execute a desired menu, select the menu,  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
To exit selection mode, press the EXIT/NO key.  
Copy Clip  
Move Clip  
Press the STORE key, and press the CLIPBOARD IN key.  
The CLIPBOARD IN point is stored.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the CLIPBOARD OUT key.  
The CLIPBOARD OUT point is stored.  
Copy Paste (or Move Paste *)  
Erase  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO PUNCH IN key.  
The AUTO PUNCH IN point is stored.  
TRK Exchange  
This data can be used as locate data.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.  
The AUTO PUNCH OUT point is stored.  
(*) After you execute Copy Clip, “Copy Paste” appears. After you execute  
Move Clip, “Move Paste” appears.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on Copy & Paste and  
Move & Paste.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO RTN START key.  
The AUTO RTN START point is stored.  
* Refer to page 59 for more information on Erase.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 61 for more information on Track Exchange.  
Press the STORE key, and press the AUTO RTN END key.  
The AUTO RTN END point is stored.  
This data can be used as locate data.  
37. Auto Return Start key  
To cancel the store operation after you have pressed this  
key, press the EXIT/NO key.  
[AUTO RTN START/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point (AUTO RTN START point)  
for the Auto Return function and the Auto Repeat function.  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays the currently-  
stored data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press  
the STORE key, then the AUTO RTN START/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 70 for more information on the Locate function.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on storing edit points  
(locate points).  
* Refer to page 33 for more information on the Program Select  
function.  
This memory is reset to the factory default value when you  
turn off the power to the FD-8.  
35. Undo/Redo key [UNDO/REDO]  
If you press the AUTO RTN START/PREVIEW key while  
holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped,  
you can preview the fade-in part at the stored AUTO RTN  
START point.  
If you wish to restore the status prior to editing, recording,  
or performing a punch in/out take, press the UNDO/REDO  
key. Pressing the UNDO/REDO key again will restore the  
status obtained before you pressed the [UNDO/REDO] key  
the first time.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
When you undo the operation, [Undo!] appears. When you  
redo the operation, [Redo!] appears on the display for a  
short moment.  
* Refer to page 70 for more information on the Auto Return  
and Auto Repeat functions.  
Note: The Undo/Redo function is enabled only when the  
FD-8 is stopped.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data  
at the AUTO RTN START point.  
Refer to pages 44, 47, 58, 60 and “Quick operation guide” for  
more information on the Undo/Redo function.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
38. Auto Return End key [AUTO RTN END/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point (AUTO RTN END point)  
for the Auto Return function and the Auto Repeat function.  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO RTN END/PREVIEW key to  
store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
* Refer to page 41 for more information on theAuto Punch In/  
Out functions.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data at  
the AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
If you press the AUTO RTN END/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored AUTO RTN END  
point.  
41. Clipboard In key [CLIPBOARD IN/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the start point of audio data to be  
copied or moved.  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays data currently  
stored, and you can edit the data. After editing the data,  
press the STORE key, then press the CLIPBOARD IN/PREVIEW  
key to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can  
be used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
* Refer to page 70 for more information on the Auto Return  
and Auto Repeat functions.  
If you press the CLIPBOARD IN/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-in part at the stored CLIPBOARD IN point.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data  
at the AUTO RTN END point.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
39. Auto Punch In key [AUTO PUNCH IN/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the punch in (recording start) point  
for the Auto Punch In/Out function The stored data is also  
used as a paste start point (for Copy & Paste, Move & Paste)  
and as an erase start point.  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on the Copy & Paste/  
Move & Paste functions.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data at  
the CLIPBOARD IN point  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO PUNCH IN/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
42. Clipboard Out key [CLIPBOARD OUT/ PREVIEW ]  
Use this key to store the end point of audio data to be copied  
or moved.  
If you press the AUTO PUNCH IN/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the CLIPBOARD OUT/PREVIEW key  
to store the edited data in this key. The stored data can be  
used as locate data.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
IfyoupresstheCLIPBOARDOUT/PREVIEWkeywhileholding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-out part at the stored CLIPBOARD OUT  
point.  
* Refer to page 41 for more information on theAuto Punch In/  
Out functions.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data at  
the AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
* Refer to page 66 for more information on setting and editing  
the locate point.  
40. Auto Punch Out key  
[AUTO PUNCH OUT/ PREVIEW ]  
* Refer to page 56 for more information on the Copy & Paste/  
Move & Paste functions.  
Use this key to store the punch out (recording end) point  
for the Auto Punch In/Out function The stored data is also  
used as an erase end point.  
* Refer to page 74 for more information on previewing data at  
the CLIPBOARD OUT point  
When you press this key, the FD-8 displays currently-stored  
data, which you can edit. After editing the data, press the  
STORE key, then press the AUTO PUNCH OUT/PREVIEW  
key to store the edited data in this key.  
The stored data can be used as locate data.  
If you press the AUTO PUNCH OUT/PREVIEW key while holding  
down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped, you can  
preview the fade-in part at the stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Front Panel (Input/Output Section)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The phone jacks for input channels 7 and 8 on the front  
panel have priority. If you connect sound sources to these  
jacks, the balanced XLR jacks for input channels 7 and 8 on  
the rear panel will be disabled.  
1.Input jacks [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8] (Connector: phone)  
Connect sound sources, such as musical instruments and  
microphones, here.  
Connect a microphone to input jacks 7 and 8, which are  
equipped with TRIM switches that allow you to switch  
according to the connected microphone output level. Input  
channels 7 and 8 also support balanced XLR connectors on  
the rear panel.  
2.Headphone jack [PHONES] (Connector: stereo TRS phone)  
Connect headphones here. You can adjust the headphone  
volume using the MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
1
2
8
7
Rear Panel (Input/Output Section)  
2 3  
4
5 6  
1
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
11  
13  
9
8
7
14  
15  
12  
10  
1. Monitor Out jacks [MON OUT L, R] (Connector: RCA pin)  
Connect monitoring speakers and amplifier or powered  
speakers here. These jacks output signals selected by the  
SELECTOR in the monitor section (L/R, L/R+MON, or MON).  
Use the MASTER knob in the monitor section to adjust the  
output level.  
2. Stereo Out jacks [ST. OUT L, R] (Connector: RCA pin)  
These jacks output stereo bus L/R signals. Connect these  
jacks to the input jacks of a master recorder. You can adjust  
the output level using the master fader L/R.  
R
ST OUT  
L
R
MON OUT  
L
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
3. AUX Send jacks 1, 2 [AUX SEND 1, 2]  
(Connector: phone)  
7. Recorder in jacks L, R [RECORDER IN L, R]  
(Connector: RCA pin)  
Connect these jacks to the input of an effect unit.  
These jacks are used to route analog signals input from an  
The AUX SEND jacks send out signals selected and adjusted  
by the AUX send knobs to the connected effect unit.  
external device directly to the recorder section. Using these  
jacks enables you to use only the recorder section, bypassing  
the mixer section.  
2
AUX SEND  
1
Signals input from these jacks are recorded to the tracks  
selected by the RECORD TRACK select keys.  
RECORDER IN  
L
R
4. AUX Return jacks 1, 2 [AUX RTN 1, 2]  
(Connector: phone)  
Connect these jacks to the output of an effect unit.  
You can also use these jacks as auxiliary inputs.  
If a connected effect unit has a mono output, connect the  
output to the L/MONO jack of the FD-8. The right channel  
willalsoreceivethesamesignal. Adjustthelevelofprocessed  
signals using AUX RTN knobs 1 and 2.  
Refer to page 54 for more information on using the  
RECORDER IN jacks.  
8. MIDI OUT jack [MIDI OUT] (Connector: DIN 5-pin)  
Connect this jack to the MIDI OUT jack of an external MIDI  
device.  
AUX RTN 2  
MONO/L  
AUX RTN 1  
MONO/L  
R
R
This jack transmits MTC (MIDI timecode), MIDI clock & Song  
Position Pointer, MMC (MIDI Machine Control) command,  
response, and FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message)  
response.  
5. Insert jacks 7, 8 [INSERT 7, 8]  
(Connector: stereo TRS phone)  
MIDI  
OUT  
Use these jacks when you wish to apply an effect to the  
signal input at input jacks 7 and 8 (unbalanced inputs on  
the front panel or balanced inputs on the rear panel).  
In particular, use them when you wish to apply a  
compressor/limiter.  
Refer to page 77 for more information on the example of using  
the MIDI OUT jack.  
9. MIDI IN jack [MIDI IN] (Connector: DIN 5-pin)  
1
2
8
7
Connect this jack to the MIDI IN jack of an external MIDI  
device. You can control the FD-8 remotely by inputting  
MMC (MIDI Machine Control) command or FEX (Fostex  
System Exclusive Message) here.  
Refer to page 38 for more information on examples of using  
the INSERT jacks.  
MIDI  
IN  
6. Balanced input connectors 7, 8 [INPUT 7, 8]  
(Connector: balanced XLR)  
Refer to page 77 for more information on using the MIDI IN  
jack.  
Connect sound sources that have balanced outputs, such  
as musical instruments and microphones.  
Input channels 7 and 8 also support phone jacks on the  
front panel.  
10. Punch in/out jack [PUNCH IN/OUT]  
(Connector: phone)  
The phone jacks for input channels 7 and 8 on the front  
panel have priority. If you connect sound sources to these  
jacks, the balanced XLR jacks for input channels 7 and 8 on  
the rear panel will be disabled.  
Using an optional foot switch connected to this jack enables  
you to perform the Manual Punch In/Out operation  
(including rehearsal) using your foot. Connect an optional  
Fostex foot switch, Model 8051.  
INPUT 8  
INPUT 7  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
Pin 1: GND  
Refer to page 45 for more information on using the PUNCH  
IN/OUT jack.  
Pin 2: HOT  
Pin 3: COLD  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
11. Data output jack [DATA OUT] (Connector: OPTICAL)  
Connect this jack to the OPTICAL digital input (or adat In)  
of an external digital device to save song data to a DAT or  
an adat, or to record digitally to a digital device (MD, DAT,  
CD-R, or adat).  
Display Section  
The FD-8 uses a liquid crystal display which integrates a 9-  
digit/35-dot message section, 7-segment display section,  
and level meters.  
The level meters indicate the output level of tracks 1-8 and  
stereo out L/R.  
DATA  
OUT  
The time display shows various temporal information in  
different units, such as ABS time (absolute time), MTC (MIDI  
timecode), BAR/BEAT/CLK (bar/beat/clock), and makes it  
easy to check the recorder’s current time.  
The message display shows various messages required to  
operate the FD-8, and offers interactive operation.  
Thissectiondescribesdisplayfunctionsalongwithexamples.  
Refer to page 48 for more information on using the DATAOUT  
jack.  
Note:You can save only the data recorded on the current  
drive formatted in [Master] mode to a DAT or adat. You  
cannot save data recorded in [Normal] mode.  
Display when the power is turned on  
When you turn on the power to the FD-8 and the connected  
external SCSI drive (a formatted removable disk or hard  
disk), the display shows the [Initial...] message, [Current  
Dr], the name of the connected current drive, then recording  
mode (Master or Normal), and finally the top position of  
the disk in the Time Base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK)  
used in the last Program before you turned the power off.  
The following example indicates that the FD-8 started with  
the ABS Time Base used in Program 1.  
12. Data input jack [DATA IN] (Connector: OPTICAL)  
Connect this jack to the OPTICAL digital output (or adat  
Out) of an external digital device to load song data from a  
DAT or an adat, or to record data digitally from a digital  
device (MD, DAT, CD-R, or adat) to the FD-8.  
DATA  
IN  
44.1kHz  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
Refer to page 48 for more information on using the DATA IN  
jack.  
A.PUNCH  
Note: You can load the data only to the current drive  
formatted in [Master] mode. You cannot load data recorded  
in [Normal] mode.  
The current drive is  
recognized. (If the cur-  
rent drive is a SCSI  
device, [SCSI] lights  
up. If the current drive  
is an optional internal  
hard disk, [IDE] lights  
up.)  
44.1kHz  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
13. SCSI connector [SCSI] (Connector: D-SUB 25-pin)  
Connect an external current SCSI drive as the recording  
media or as a backup SCSI drive for the FD-8.  
A.PUNCH  
SCSI  
The name of the SCSI drive (The name is  
different, depending on the type of device.)  
44.1kHz  
Refer to the “Quick Operation Guide” for information on  
connecting an external SCSI drive.  
Indicating a recording  
mode used during for-  
matting.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
14. AC IN connector  
The power cable packaged with this recorder ia connected  
here.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
Note: Always plug the power cable to the recorder before  
plugging the cable into the wall outlet.  
M
S
F
Indicating Time Base  
ABS 0 (top of the disk)  
PGM  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
15. Power switch [POWER]  
This switch turns power on and off to the FD-8.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Preset display  
Lights up when the FD-8 receives MTC (MIDI Time  
Code) from an external device.  
M T C  
%
The display below shows all preset items for explanation  
purposes.  
Lights up when the FD-8 enters Vari Pitch data edit  
mode.  
MTC DIGITAL  
32kHz 44.1kHz 48kHz  
Indicates available disk space on the disk in  
megabytes when the REMAIN indicator appears.  
MIDI  
SLAVE  
SETUP  
OFFSET  
MTC  
MB  
BAR  
M
CLK  
MB  
F
REMAIN ABS  
LOC MTC IN  
H
S
DF  
SF  
%
OL  
VARI PITCH  
TEMPO  
PGM  
0
Lights up to indicate a time value whenABS or MTC  
is used as Time Base.  
.
6
.
SURE ?  
COMPLETED!  
H, M, S, F, SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
MTC  
IDE  
SCSI  
TAKE  
12  
.
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
PLAY  
RTN  
RHSL  
24  
.
Lights up to indicate a bar/beat/clock value when  
BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected as Time Base.  
BAR, , CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
Indicates a Program title, edit parameters, and  
SETUP mode parameters.  
The level meter shows the recorder output level and the  
recording level for tracks 1~8 and stereo bus L, R.  
Indicates the “SYNC OUT settings” in SETUP  
mode.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
Lights up when ABS is selected as Time Base.  
Lights up when MTC is selected as Time Base.  
ABS  
MTC  
Indicates the AUTO PLAY/AUTO RTN mode  
settings.  
Lights up to indicate available recording time and  
space on the disk.  
REMAIN  
SETUP  
The current drive that the FD-8 recognizes (SCSI  
or IDE) appears on the display. (See the following  
note.)  
DRIVE  
Lights up when the FD-8 enters SETUP mode.  
A.PUNCH  
Indicates the AUTO PUNCH mode settings.  
Lights up when an edit operation (copy, move,  
paste, or erase) is completed.  
COMPLETED !  
SURE ?  
Note: If only a SCSI drive is connected to the FD-8, [SCSI] lights up. If an optional  
2.5-inch internal IDE hard disk has been installed but no external SCSI device is  
connected as the current drive, [IDE] lights up. If a SCSI drive is connected, turned on,  
and specified as the current drive, and an internal hard disk is also connected, only  
[SCSI] will light up.  
Lights up to confirm or cancel the operation when  
you are making settings or edits.  
Lights up when the MTC Offset menu is selected in  
SETUP mode.  
MTC OFFSET  
PGM  
Display examples for Time Base selected via the  
TIME BASE SEL key  
Lights up to indicate the current Program number.  
You can use the TIME BASE SEL key to select ABS, BAR/  
BEAT/CLK, or MTC as Time Base. The following examples  
show the displays when you select a Time Base at the  
beginning of the disk of Program 1.  
Lights up when the tempo setting menu is selected  
in SETUP mode.  
TEMPO  
Lights up when Vari Pitch mode is turned on.  
VARI PITCH  
44.1kHz  
Time Base is ABS.  
44.1kHz  
Indicates a sampling rate of the corresponding  
Recording mode. It does not light up when the disk  
is formatted in Normal mode.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Lights up to indicate that MTC is input from an  
external MIDI device to the FD-8.  
MTC IN  
LOC  
Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
Lights up when the FD-8 enters locate point (edit  
point) edit mode.  
44.1kHz  
BAR  
CLK  
Lights up when the digital input track settings are  
made in SETUP mode and the FD-8 is receiving  
digital signals correctly. However, if the FD-8 is not  
receiving digital signals correctly, or if there is a  
connection problem, this indicator flashes.  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
DIGITAL  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Time Base is MTC.  
FlasheswhenSlavemodeinSETUPmodeisturned  
on. When a signal is locked, the flashing indicator  
lights up steadily.  
44.1kHz  
SLAVE  
M I D I  
MTC  
H
M
S
F
PGM  
Lights up when the FD-8 is receiving effective MIDI  
messages (MMC or FEX) from an external device.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Time Base is MTC.  
Selecting Time Base using the DISP SEL key  
44.1kHz  
When you press the DISP SEL key after you select a Time  
Base using the TIME BASE SEL key, the display changes as  
follows:  
MTC  
H
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Time Base is ABS.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
44.1kHz  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
MB  
CLK  
SCSI  
REMAIN  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
44.1kHz  
MB  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
44.1kHz  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
44.1kHz  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
The REMAIN display  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
The REMAIN display usually shows available recording space  
and time on the disk, calculated based on mono track recording.  
That is, it indicates how much space and time are available for  
recording on a track. Therefore, if you wish to know how much  
time is available for multiple-track recording, you need to divide  
the REMAIN value by the number of tracks you wish to record.  
The value calculation includes all data from Real tracks and  
Additional tracks. If some data exists on the Additional tracks,  
but not on the Real tracks, the space and time consumed by  
the Additional tracks are considered during the calculation.  
For more information on the REMAIN display, refer to  
“Recording method and REMAIN display” in the “Before  
Starting” chapter on page 22.  
AUTO  
Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
44.1kHz  
CLK  
BAR  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
AUTO  
44.1kHz  
This number indicates available recording  
space on the disk for recording on a track.  
BAR  
REMAIN  
MB  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
CLK  
44.1kHz  
AUTO  
MB  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
H
M
S
F
MTC IN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
A.PUNCH  
This number indicates available recording time on the  
disk for recording on a track. For example, if you record  
on eight tracks, one-eighth of the indicated duration is  
the available recording time for each track.  
AUTO  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and Functions  
Warning messages  
The following warnings are shown operating mistakes are made, an unsuitable editing point (= locate point) is input,  
or when errors occur. If any of these warnings appear, refer to information detailed below.  
<Track Over> message  
This message appears when  
trying to record more than 2  
<Void Data> message  
This means registered data  
necessary for the selected  
operation is incorrect.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
tracks  
of  
signals  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
simultaneously using a MO  
drive/disk as a Current Drive.  
Action to take: Re-register the correct data.  
Action to take: The MO drive only allows to record up to 2  
tracks at a time. After changing the RECORD TRACK select key  
setting, please record signals.  
<Void Out !> message  
Thismeanstheregisteredin/  
out point is wrong.  
<Rec + Yes !> message  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SETUP  
SCSI  
This is displayed when  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
formatting. This means press  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
the EXECUTE/YES key while  
pressing the RECORD button.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Action to take: Re-register the correct data.  
Action to take:  
<Select Trk> message  
This means a track has not  
been specified.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key while pressing the RECORD button.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
<Protected> message  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This means the disk inserted  
in the drive cannot be used  
because it is write-protected.  
The disk will be ejected  
automatically.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
Action to take: Select any one track with the RECORD TRACK  
select key.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Action to take:  
Release the write-protect and re-insert it.  
<Over !> message  
This means that disk space  
necessary for recording and  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
editing is insufficient.  
SCSI  
<Acc Error> message  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This message indicates that  
an error occurs when  
accessing the disk. With this  
message, no keys and buttons  
do not function at all.  
Action to take: Before proceeding to the next operation,  
temporarily data in order to source empty space necessary for  
the next operation.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Action to take: If this message appears, please follow the  
following procedures.  
<Load Err > message  
This means that loading is  
impossible because there is  
an error in data applied to  
1. Leave the disk inside the SCSI drive and turn off the power to  
the FD-8 and all connected devices.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
the DATA IN connector from  
the external DAT, or adat.  
2. Turn on the power to the SCSI drive.  
3. Make sure that the orange LED on the SCSI drive lights up in  
green and that the disk is not being accessed, turn on the  
power to the FD-8.  
Action to take: Check the external DAT or adat connected to  
the DATA IN connector and be sure there is no problem with  
the DAT, or adat tape. Then, try loading again.  
<Unformat !> message  
An unformatted or crashed  
SCSI disk. After a few  
seconds of this display, the  
FD-8 automatically enters  
the SETUP mode [Format ?]  
menu.  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
A.PUNCH  
Action to take: Press the EXECUTE/YES key while pressing the  
RECORD button.  
Note: Any sound data recorded up to this point on the disk  
will be lost.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Before Starting  
This chapter describes some basic items that you need to know before you start operating the FD-8.  
All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based multitrackers and those who are new to  
multitrackers, should read this chapter thoroughly to understand the functions of the FD-8.  
1. Time Base  
2. Recording method and REMAIN indicator  
3. Managing songs by Program Change function  
4. Real tracks and Additional tracks  
5. Input monitoring and playback monitoring  
6. Signal flow (The PAN knob function and Stereo Bus)  
7. Audio file and Event  
Time Base  
The word “Time Base” appears frequently in this manual. The concept of Time Base is similar to a “tape counter”  
on a conventional tape-based multitracker in that it indicates the precise position of the recorder transport  
section (the current position).  
The FD-8 offers three types of Time Base: ABS (Absolute type), MTC (MIDI time code), and BAR/BEAT/CLK (bar/  
beat/clock). ABS indicates an absolute time on the disk. MTC indicates a relative time that is obtained by adding  
a certain value (MTC offset value) to the ABS value. BAR/BEAT/CLK indicates the position in a song created in the  
internal Tempo Map according to MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer. The following diagrams depict the  
relationship among these three types of the Time Base.  
ABS 0  
DISK END  
00M, 00S, 00F  
00M, 08S, 00F  
REC END  
23H, 59M, 59S  
ABS  
-002 BAR, 1 , 00 CLK  
001 BAR, 1 , 00 CLK  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
BAR = 001BAR, 0404  
TEMPO=001BAR, 1 , 60  
01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
00H, 59M, 59S  
01H, 00M, 08S, 00F  
MTC  
MTC OFFSET=01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC OFFSET MODE=ABS  
This shall be assumed to be the  
MTC OFFSET time set for the ABS  
00M, 00S, and 00F positions.  
00H, 59M, 51S  
00H, 59M, 52S, 00F  
01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC  
MTC OFFSET=01H, 00M, 00S, 00F  
MTC OFFSET MODE=BAR  
This shall be assumed to be the MTC  
non recorded area  
recorded area  
OFFSET time set for the 00 BAR, 1  
and 00 CLK positions.  
You can switch between these three types of Time Base  
to suit your purpose. (Refer to the explanation in “Display  
Section” on page 17 for more information on switching  
Time Base.)  
Note: When BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected as Time Base,  
the position forABS 0 (top of the disk) is always “-2 BAR,  
1 , 00 CLK” and you cannot modify this value.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Recording method and REMAIN indicator  
Recording method  
The FD-8 uses a SCSI removable disk (such as an MO disk, EZ disk, or Zip disk) instead of a cassette tape. You  
can start recording sound sources from any point on a formatted disk as long as the point is within the range  
of 24 hours in ABS time, as described in the previous “Time Base” section. (Refer to the following diagram.)  
REC END  
12M 00S 00F  
23H, 59M, 59S  
03M 00S 00F  
10M 00S 00F  
You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.  
ABS 0  
recorded area (3 min.)  
unrecorded area  
recorded area (2 min.) unrecorded area  
White areas are unrecorded areas.  
You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.  
The area actually used on the disk.  
recorded area (5 min.)  
unrecorded area (25 min.)  
Gray areas are recorded areas.  
recordable disk area (e.g.: 30 minutes)  
For example, if you record three minutes of data starting from ABS 0 (top of the disk) to ABS 03M 00S 00F on  
a disk that has a recordable space of thirty minutes, as shown in the diagram, then if you record two minutes  
starting at the 10-minute point in ABS time (ABS 10M 00S 00F) to ABS 12M 00S 00F, the recording end point  
(REC END) is 12 minutes (ABS 12M 00S 00F) in ABS time. However, this does not mean that the entire  
recording duration is 12 minutes. The disk space actually used for recording is five minutes (3 minutes + 2  
minutes).  
That is, the area between three minutes and ten minutes (that corresponds to 25 minutes of recording space)  
in terms of ABS time is still unrecorded.  
When you try to play or fast forward this unrecorded area, the time counter on the display will count, but the  
FD-8 will not access the disk. However, MTC will be output when you try to play this area.  
On the FD-8, the top of the disk is called “ABS 0” and the recording end point is called “REC END.”  
REMAIN indicator  
The REMAIN indicator displays available recording time expressed in time value (ABS or MTC) or bar/beat/  
clock (BAR/BEAT/CLI) value, depending on the currently selected Time Base. It also indicates the available  
disk space. Right after you format the disk, the REMAIN indicator will show the maximum recordable time  
and space on the disk. The following example shows that the disk had about 20 minutes or 100MB recordable  
space after the disk format operation, and has recorded data of 4 minutes 27 seconds (or 19MB).  
<Display example>  
The REMAIN indicator displays the  
44.1kHz  
amount of unrecorded area.  
MB  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
recorded area (4 min. 27 sec./19MB)  
unrecorded area (15 min. 33 sec./81MB)  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
recordable disk area (20 min./100MB)  
The REMAIN value is calculated on a mono-track basis. That is, the value indicates available recording time  
and space if you record on one mono track.  
For example, if you wish to know how much you can record on four tracks, you need to divide the current  
REMAIN value by eight.  
The REMAIN value is also calculated by deducting the time and space of all data on the Real tracks and  
Additional tracks from the original available recording time and space. Therefore, even if there is no recording  
on Real tracks, but there is data on Additional tracks, the REMAIN time will consider the time and space used  
by the data to calculate available time and space.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
As described in “Managing the song by Program,” the FD-8 can set up as many as 99 Programs on the disk. Setting  
up a Program requires a small amount of disk space. In other words, disk space is used not only for storing  
recorded data but also for storing all setup data. Therefore, make sure that you have enough space on the disk  
before you start recording to avoid running out of space (the [OVER !] message flashes in that case).  
Managing songs by Program Change function  
The FD-8 features Program Select function, which enables you to set up to 99 Programs on the disk.  
When you format a disk, one Program will be automatically created on the disk. You may create more Programs,  
if necessary. You may also delete unnecessary Programs.  
The FD-8 also features Program Change function that enables you to select one of the Programs set on the disk.  
Programs on the disk are something like independent containers. You can record, play, and edit each container  
without affecting other containers. You can also name Programs, which is useful for managing songs.  
program 1  
program 4  
program 7  
program 3  
program 6  
program 9  
program 2  
program 5  
program 8  
You can set up to 99 programs (independent containers).  
You can name a Program.  
(This example shows a “temporary  
title” automatically named to  
Program 1 right after you format the  
disk.)  
This indicates the number of the currently  
selected Program. (In this example,  
Program 1 is selected.)  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Note: Total available recording time is always the  
Refer to page 33 for more information on the program  
maximum available recording time on the disk,  
regardless of the number of Programs you set on the  
disk. That is, if you use up the maximum recording  
time for one Program, you will not be able to record  
any data in other Programs.  
select function.  
Refer to page 35 for more information on the program  
delete function.  
Note: As described in the “REMAIN indicator,”  
creating additional Programs will consume a small  
Refer to page 36 for more information on the editing  
a program title.  
amount of disk space.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Real tracks and Additional tracks  
The FD-8 features eight Real tracks (1-8) and sixteen Additional tracks (9-24), for a total of twenty-four tracks.  
Real tracks are used to record sound sources in real-time. Additional tracks are used to temporarily store the  
sound recorded in the Real tracks. This is useful since you can move data from Real tracks to Additional  
tracks to clear tracks for fresh recording. The Track Exchange function of the FD-8 handles this operation.  
This function allows you to swap data freely between twenty-four mono tracks.  
You can also swap data between multiple Real tracks and Additional tracks as an eight-track unit.  
Real tracks (Trk 1 - Trk 8)  
Additional tracks (Trk 9 - TRK 16)  
Additional tracks (Trk 17 - Trk 24)  
You can also swap data between Real tracks and  
Additional tracks in units of eight tracks.  
You can swap data between twenty-four mono tracks.  
Note: You cannot record data on Additional  
tracks in real-time. Also, you cannot play back  
data on Additional tracks as is in real-time.  
If you wish to play back data on an Additional  
track, first use the Track Exchange function to  
move the data to a Real track. Also, you need to  
move the data to a Real track if you wish to check  
the REC END point of a song on an Additional  
track.  
Note: Data on theAdditional tracks also affects  
the REMAIN value. If Real tracks contain no data,  
but Additional tracks contain data, the amount of  
data (time and space) will be reflected in the  
REMAIN value.  
Refer to page 61 for more information on the Track  
Exchange function.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Input monitoring and playback monitoring  
There are two methods for monitoring track sound (only on the Real tracks): input monitoring and playback  
monitoring. They are defined as follows:  
Input monitoring  
Input monitoring means to monitor via track output the recording signal sent to the Real tracks of the recorder.  
That is, you are monitoring a post-recorder signal, not a pre-recorder signal. The FD-8 enters input monitoring  
status when you perform one of the following operations.  
• When you set a track to recording mode  
To set a track to recording mode, press the RECORD TRACK select key to set the track READY, then press the PLAY  
buttonwhile holding down the RECORD button.  
When recording starts on the READY track, the FD-8 automatically enters input monitoring status.  
• When you set a track to recording stand-by mode  
To set a track to recording stand-by mode, press the RECORD TRACK select key to set the track READY, then press only  
the RECORD button. (Pressing the RECORD button again will cause the FD-8 to enter playback monitoring mode.)  
Under this condition, only the READY track enters input monitoring mode, on stand-by for recording.  
* The following example shows track 5 in Input Monitoring mode and other tracks in Playback Monitoring mode.  
Track 8  
This example shows overdubbing  
in which the keyboard is recorded  
on track 5 while tracks 1-4 are  
Track 7  
Track 6  
being played. Tracks 1-4 are in  
Playback Monitoring mode and  
used to check the playback sound.  
Track 5 is in Input Monitoring mode.  
You can monitor the recorded  
sound.  
Track 5  
Mixer section  
Keyboard  
Monitoring  
section  
Track 4 (Vocal)  
Track 3 (Guitar)  
Track 2 (Bass)  
Track 1 (Drum machine)  
Recorder section  
Playback monitoring  
“Playback monitoring” means to monitor the playback sound of the tracks (only Real tracks).  
That is, you are monitoring the playback sound on the track, not the sound being recorded to the track.  
* The following example shows that all tracks are in Playback Monitoring mode.  
Track 8 (Piano)  
Track 7 (Keyboard)  
Track 6 (Vocal)  
Track 5 (Vocal)  
Monitoring  
In this example, all tracks 1-8 are playing the recorded  
Track 4 (Guitar-2)  
Track 3 (Guitar-1)  
Track 2 (Bass)  
section  
sound in Playback Monitoring mode.  
Track 1 (Drum machine)  
Recorder section  
* To play the sound on anAdditional track, you need to move the data from theAdditional track to a Real track. Refer to “Track Exchange  
function” on page 61 for more information.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Signal flow (The PAN knob function and Stereo Bus)  
The FD-8 is equipped with an eight-channel mixer function, which enables you to mix and record eight sound  
sources into stereo signal. The following diagram is designed to help you visualize the signal flow of the FD-8.  
It illustrates how input signals are routed through the mixer and sent to the recorder section.  
The thick pipes in the diagram are called the “Stereo Bus,” which collects input channel signals passing through  
the equalizers and distributes them to L or R via the PAN knobs. The signal is adjusted for final output by the  
master faders L/R, then output from the STEREO OUT L/R jacks. At the same time, the signal is sent to the  
recorder (external SCSI disk) and recorded onto the tracks selected by the RECORD RACK select keys.  
The PAN knobs function as a “turning signal” to Stereo Bus L or R. That is, turning the PAN knob toward L will  
send signals to Stereo Bus L, and turning the PAN knob toward R will send signals to Stereo Bus R. If you set the  
PAN knob in the center, signals are sent equally to Stereo Bus L and R. At the same time, Stereo Bus L signals are  
finally sent to Real tracks 1, 3, 5, and 7, and Stereo Bus R signals are sent to Real tracks 2, 4, 6, and 8.  
Recording tracks are selected via the RECORD RACK select keys.  
For example, if you input three sound sources (guitar, vocal, and keyboard), set the channel PAN knobs as shown  
below, and press the RECORD RACK select keys 1/L and 2/R to record the sources to tracks 1 and 2, the sound  
sources are recorded to tracks 1 and 2 as shown below.  
If you wish to record all eight sources input to Channels 1-8, turn all channel PAN knobs toward L, and press the  
RECORD TRACK select key 1/L to select track 1 as a recording track.  
STEREO OUT L, R  
STEREO BUS L  
STEREO BUS R  
PAN  
EQ  
PAN  
EQ  
PAN  
EQ  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Note: The FD-8 is capable of eight-track simultaneous recording. (Except that using an MO disk will limit this  
number to two tracks.)  
For example, if you connect all instruments to the input channels as shown above and select all tracks for  
recording, guitar and vocal sounds will be recorded on tracks 1, 3, 5, and 7, and keyboard and vocal sounds to  
tracks 2, 4, 6, and 8.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Starting  
Audio file and event  
<About an audio file>  
During recording, the FD-8 consecutively records an independent audio file (recorded area) in each track of each  
Program. However, you can record data on the FD-8 at any point within 24 hours of ABS time, and you can  
intentionally create silence between two audio files. In this case, a silent part is counted as a 0 file.  
Therefore, audio files and 0 files are consecutively created as shown in the diagram below.  
The total number of these audio files and 0 files is called “the number of events.” The maximum number of  
events is 512 per track (tracks 1-24). After the number of events reaches 507, new data will not be recorded.  
REC END  
ABS 0  
Audio File 1  
Audio File 2  
0 File 1  
Audio File 3  
0 File 2 Audio File 4  
Recorded area  
Silence  
Usually, an event is created by one recording or edit. The number of events increases or decreases depending on  
the number of edit points or the amount of disk free space. (FD-8 disk management operates in such way that the  
number of events will decrease.) The number of events does not affect usual music production. However, if a  
small amount of single-track data is written in many different sections on the disk, the maximum number of  
events may be reached. To avoid this “event number overflow,” you need to check the number of events for each  
track. The FD-8 provides an event check menu in Setup mode for this purpose.  
<Notes on digital recording>  
During analog recording, “0 files” are not created since silence does not create “data 0.” However, during S/P DIF and adat  
digital recording, the FD-8 records “data 0” (this is called “mute recording”). When one second of consecutive data 0 is input  
to the FD-8, it creates a “0 file” and limits the consumption of disk space. However, repeating this operation will eventually  
increase the number of events, leading to “event number overflow.”  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting a Disk  
Formatting a Disk  
The “Quick Operation Guide” and the “Saving and Loading Song Data” chapter of this book describe how to  
format a disk. This chapter explains how to format an unformatted disk and how to re-format a formatted disk.  
Formatting a disk refers to both formatting the current drive disk and formatting a backup disk. You will use the  
[Format ?] and the [Bk Format?] menus in Setup Mode.  
Recording mode  
There are three recording Modes: “Normal mode,” “Mastering mode,” and “Backup mode.” Normal mode and  
Mastering mode are used to format a disk as the current disk. Backup mode is used to format a SCSI disk  
(removable or fixed) for saving and loading song data.  
For use  
Recording mode for current drive  
Recording mode for backup  
Mastering mode  
Backup mode  
Normal mode  
Record mode  
Sampling Rate  
Quantumize  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
A.D.A.C. (*)  
16bit liner  
Approx. 67 minutes/100MB  
(converted to one track)  
Approx. 17 minutes/100MB  
(converted to one track)  
Available recording time  
MO disk, EZ disk, Zip cartridge,  
Fixed hard disk,  
MO disk, EZ disk, Zip cartridge,  
Fixed hard disk,  
Fixed hard disk,  
Compatible media  
Optional 2.5 inch IDE internal hard disk  
Optional 2.5 inch IDE internal hard disk  
* Simultaneous 8 track recording by adat  
digital input is possible.  
* Simultaneous 8 track recording by adat  
digital input is possible.  
This is a special backup disk format for  
saving and loading data. You cannot use a  
disk in this format for real-time recording/  
playback.  
* 4 tracks simultaneous recording by S/P  
DIF digital signal (two inputs) and analog  
signal (two inputs) is possible.  
Recording  
Save/Load  
* 4 tracks simultaneous recording by S/P  
DIF digital signal (two inputs) and analog  
signal (two inputs is possible.  
Note: Simultaneous recording by MO disk  
is a maximum two tracks.  
You can save and load data between the  
backup disk and a current drive disk  
formatted in any mode (Normal or Mastering  
mode).  
Save/load is possible only with external  
SCSI drives.  
Save/load is not possible with DATand adat.  
Save/load is possible only with external  
SCSI drive, DAT or adat.  
(*) A.D.A.C. is the next generation digital audio coding technique maximized for multitrack recording, which has been developed by joint research of Matsushita Electric  
Industry Corporation and Fostex Corporation.  
Note: Available recording time varies depending on the disk capacity and type. For actual available time for a particular disk,  
please refer to the “List of the drives with guaranteed operation” in the Owner’s Manual.  
Note: You can format only a fixed disk or an optional 2.5-inch internal hard disk in Mastering or Normal modes. (The optional  
2.5-inch internal hard disk must have its SCSI ID number set to any number except “6.”)  
To use a removable type disk as the current drive, format the disk in Normal mode. Formatting a removable disk in Mastering  
mode will not provide you with enough recording space. Data recorded on a disk formatted in Normal mode cannot be saved  
or loaded using a DAT or adat. Those formatted in Mastering mode are capable of saving and loading data to and from a DAT  
or adat.  
You may format a disk for backup as long as the SCSI drive (fixed or removable) is set to ID number “6.” If you execute the  
[Format ?] menu in SETUP mode, the FD-8 will automatically recognize a connected SCSI drive or a 2.5-inch internal hard disk  
set to any ID number other than “6.” If you execute the [Bk Format ?] menu, the FD-8 will automatically recognize the SCSI drive  
set to ID number “6.”  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting a Disk  
Formatting a current drive disk (SCSI disk)  
You may use a SCSI removable disk, a fixed hard disk, or an optional 2.5-inch internal hard disk as the FD-8’s  
current drive. This section explains how to format a SCSI-type removable or fixed disk. Before you can format a  
SCSI disk, [SCSI] should appear in the [DRIVE] indication area. If you are also using an optional 2.5-inch internal  
hard disk, make sure that the following indication appears on the display.  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
ABS  
M
S
F
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
PGM  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
AUTO  
DRIVE  
[SCSI] is lights up  
[SCSI] is lights up  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
A.PUNCH  
<The display when disk is set in the current drive.>  
<The display when no disk is set in the current drive.>  
Formatting a new disk  
The following procedure explains how to format a new SCSI disk, and assumes that a SCSI drive (removable or  
fixed hard disk) is connected to the FD-8 as the current drive.  
5. Press and hold the RECORD button and press the  
1. Turn on the power to the FD-8 and the current drive.  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
The [Initial...] message, then [No Disk] message appears  
on the display. (If a fixed hard disk is connected, the  
[Initial...] message, then the [Un Format !] message ap-  
pears and the FD-8 enters SETUP mode. Skip to Step 3  
below.)  
The FD-8 starts formatting in selected recording mode.  
[REMAIN] lights up on the display, and a negative value  
of the unformatted disk area size will count down as the  
format operation progresses. Please wait a while.  
When formatting is complete, [COMPLETED !] lights up  
on the display, and the FD-8 stops spinning the disk.  
2. Insert a new removable disk into the current drive.  
The FD-8 displays the “UnFormat!” message, then auto-  
matically enters SETUP mode, and displays the “Format  
?” menu. At this time, the ID number (e.g., [SCSi id-2])  
of the connected SCSI drive (or fixed disk) will appear  
and [SURE ?] will blink on the display.  
Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button to exit  
SETUP mode.  
6.  
Formatting will automatically create one Program 1 on  
the disk. The Time Base will change to ABS 0.  
7. Press the DISP SEL key to change to the REMAIN  
display and check the available recording time.  
Press the DISP SEL key again to return to the Time Base  
display.  
3. Make sure that the ID number is correct and the  
[SURE ?] message appears, then press the EX-  
ECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays [Pls Wait !], then immediately displays  
the recording mode menu, with [Normal] (Normal mode)  
and [SURE ?] flashing.  
Press the EXIT/NO key while holding down the SHIFT  
key to eject the removable disk from the drive.  
Turn the JOG dial to select the desired recording  
mode.  
4.  
Turning the JOG dial toggles between [Normal] and [Mas-  
If you wish to format another removable disk, insert the  
disk and repeat the procedure described above.  
ter].  
Note: If you are using a removable MO, Zip, or EZ disk as  
the current drive, select [Normal]. If you are using a fixed  
disk or optional 2.5 inch internal hard disk, select [Normal]  
or [Master]. Note that you cannot save or load data via a  
DAT or adat if you recorded the data on a disk formatted in  
Normal mode.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting a Disk  
Re-formatting a formatted disk  
This section explains how to re-format a current drive (Master or Normal) or backup disk as the current disk.  
You need to use the [Format ?] menu in SETUP mode to reformat a disk. In the following procedure, we assume  
that a SCSI drive is connected to the FD-8 and that the power to the FD-8 and the SCSI drive is turned on. (The  
same procedure also applies to a fixed disk.)  
5. Use the JOG dial to select the desired recording  
1. Insert a formatted disk into the SCSI drive.  
mode. Press and hold down the RECORD button  
and press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays the recording mode of the disk (Nor-  
mal FM or Master FM), then displays ABS 0 of Program  
1. If you are using a disk formatted for backup, the FD-  
8 displays [Illegal FM], then the Time Base indication.  
The FD-8 starts formatting the disk in selected record-  
ing mode.  
[REMAIN] lights up on the display, and the negative value  
of the unformatted disk area size will count down as the  
format operation progresses. Please wait a while.  
When formatting is complete, [COMPLETED !] lights up  
on the display, and the FD-8 stops spinning the disk.  
Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode and  
turn the JOG dial to select [Format ?].  
2.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
6. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button to exit  
The ID number of the connected SCSI drive appears and  
[SURE ?] flashes on the display.  
SETUP mode.  
Formatting will automatically create one Program 1 on  
the disk, and the Time Base will change to ABS 0.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
The recording mode selection display appears. The cur-  
rent recording mode of the disk (Normal or Master) and  
[SURE ?] flash.  
7. Press the DISP SEL key to change to the REMAIN  
display and check the available recording time.  
Press the DISP SEL key again to return to the Time Base  
display.  
Note: Before re-formatting a formatted disk, first make sure that the disk does not contain data you want to keep. Otherwise,  
you may lose your important archives.  
To cancel the format operation, press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button prior to Step 5 above to return to the previous level  
in the menu hierarchy and exit SETUP mode.  
<Notes on re-formatting a disk>  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
When you re-format a backup disk to be a current drive disk, insert-  
ing the disk in the current drive displays [Illegal FM] followed by the  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
ABS 0 Time Base.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Although the ABS 0 Time Base appears, the disk cannot be used in  
its present condition as the current drive disk to perform real-time  
playback/recording. The display indicates the ABS 0 Time Base of  
the backup disk when the FD-8 enters Setup mode. Therefore, af-  
ter you insert the backup disk into the current drive, do not perform  
any operation other than using the [Format ?] menu in SETUP mode.  
Otherwise, the disk may run erratically any operations will be ig-  
nored. If this happens, turn off the power to the FD-8, then turn it on  
again.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting a Disk  
Formatting a current drive disk (2.5-inch hard disk)  
If you have ordered an optional 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk, the Fostex service department will format the  
disk in [Master] mode and install it in the FD-8 before delivery. You do not have to format it from scratch.  
However, if you wish to re-format the 2.5-inch hard disk, follow the steps described above in the “Re-formatting”  
section. Before you start the format operation, make sure that the FD-8 displays the following indication:  
<Note on formatting an optional 2.5-inch hard disk>  
44.1kHz  
[IDE] appears on the display when you turn on the power to the FD-8  
ABS  
M
S
F
with an optional 2.5-inch hard disk installed and without a SCSI drive  
connected, or with a SCSI drive that is connected to the FD-8 but not  
turned on. It indicates that the FD-8 recognizes an optional internal  
hard disk as the current drive. So make sure that the [IDE] indicator  
appears when you format the 2.5-inch hard disk. The re-formatting  
procedure described above applies to formatting the IDE hard disk.  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
[IDE] is lights up  
Formatting a backup disk (SCSI disk)  
Song data you recorded in the current drive (SCSI drive, fixed disk, or optional 2.5-inch hard disk) can be saved  
to a backup SCSI drive disk, as well as a DAT or adat, and can be re-loaded later. To use a backup SCSI drive, you  
need to set the SCSI ID number of the backup drive to “6” and format it in backup recording mode.  
The FD-8 does not indicate the connected backup disk on the display (unlike the current drive). You need to use  
[Bk Format?] menu in SETUP mode to format a backup disk while the current drive is on. However, if the disk has  
not yet been formatted, you may format it during the save/load operation.  
For more information on formatting an unformatted disk for saving and loading song data, refer to “Saving and  
Loading Song Data” on page 85.  
The following procedure assumes that a current drive (SCSI drive, fixed disk, or optional 2.5-inch hard disk) is  
connected to the FD-8, and a Program on the current drive disk is selected.  
Formatting an unformatted disk for backup  
This procedure enables you to format a new disk for backup, and assumes that a disk has been installed in the current  
drive.  
4. Press and hold the RECORD button and press the  
1. Insert a new disk into the backup drive.  
The display remains showing the Time Base indication  
for the current drive disk.  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 starts formatting  
[REMAIN] lights up on the display, and the negative value  
of the unformatted disk area size will count down as the  
format operation progresses. Please wait a while.  
When formatting is complete, [COMPLETED !] lights up  
on the display, and the FD-8 stops spinning the disk.  
At the same time, the FD-8 shows the maximum record-  
able space. (To check the REMAIN time and space, refer  
to the following <Memo>.)  
2. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode, and  
turn the JOG dial to select the [Bk Format ?] menu.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
3.  
The FD-8 displays [UnFormat] and [SCSi id-6], and  
[SURE?] flashes. This means that the disk with the ID  
number “6” is ready for formatting.  
5. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button.  
If you turn the JOG dial, [Eject] appears, and pressing  
the EXECUTE/YES key will eject the disk.  
The display will change from the REMAIN indication for  
the backup disk to the Time Base indication for the cur-  
rent drive.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting a Disk  
<Memo>  
To check the REMAIN time for the backup disk after formatting it, eject the disk, then replace it with the disk in the current  
drive. Then press the DISP SEL key to show the REMAIN display. You can check the REMAIN time of the backup disk in  
this way. However, you cannot perform another operation using the backup disk at this time. Attempting to do so will cause  
the FD-8 to display [Illegal FM] and ignore your operation.  
To eject the disk from the backup drive or the current drive after the format operation, follow the procedure below:  
* To eject a disk from the backup drive: Press the Eject button on the drive.  
* To eject a disk from the current drive: Press and hold the SHIFT key and press the EXIT/NO key.  
Re-formatting a formatted disk for backup  
This section explains how to re-format a backup or current drive (Master or Normal) disk as a backup disk.  
The following procedure assumes that a disk has been installed in the current drive.  
4. Press and hold the RECORD button and press the  
Insert a formatted disk into the backup drive.  
The display continues to show the Time Base for the cur-  
rent drive.  
1.  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 starts formatting.  
[REMAIN] lights up on the display, and the negative value  
of the unformatted disk area will count down as the for-  
mat operation progresses. Please wait a while.  
When formatting is complete, [COMPLETED !] lights up  
on the display, and the FD-8 stops spinning the disk.  
At the same time, the FD-8 shows the maximum record-  
able space. (To check the REMAIN time and space, refer  
to the <Memo> on the previous page.)  
2. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode, and  
turn the JOG dial to select the [Bk Format ?] menu.  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
3.  
The FD-8 displays the recording mode that corresponds  
to the disk format. The [SCSi id-6] message appears and  
[SURE?] flashes.  
A different message appears depending on the type of  
format used by the disk as shown below.  
5. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button.  
The display will change from the REMAIN indication for  
the backup disk to the Time Base indication for the cur-  
rent drive.  
If you turn the JOG dial, [Eject] appears, and pressing  
the EXECUTE/YES key ejects the disk.  
Type of format  
Backup mode  
Mastering mode  
Normal mode  
Message  
[Backup Dsk]  
[Master FM]  
[Normal FM]  
Note: Before re-formatting a formatted disk, first make sure that the disk does not contain data that you want to keep.  
Otherwise, you may lose your important archives.  
To cancel the format operation, press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button prior to Step 4 above to return to the previous  
level in the menu hierarchy and exit SETUP mode.  
Formatting a backup disk (fixed disk)  
You can also use a fixed disk by setting its ID number to “6.”  
The formatting procedure described above also applies to formatting a fixed disk as a backup disk.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
Handling Programs  
This chapter explains how to handle Programs. It covers the following topics:  
1. Creating a new Program  
2. Using a Program Change function  
3. Deleting a Program  
4. Editing a Program title  
Creating a new Program  
You can manage individual songs by setting multiple Programs on the disk as explained in the “Managing songs  
by Program Change function” section of the “Before Starting” chapter. You can create up to 99 Programs can be  
created as long as the disk space allows. When you format a disk, one Program will be automatically created.  
Follow the steps below to create a new Program (in addition to the Program created on the disk during the format  
operation).  
3. While holding down the HOLD/> key, press the  
1 (Turn on the power)  
STORE key.  
[Select PGM] appears on the display briefly, then changes  
to a flashing “01” ([#0001 of PGM 01) and [SURE?] flash.  
([#0001] is the default name of PGM 01.)  
3
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
2
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
4. Turn the JOG dial clockwise.  
The question marks “?” of [New PGM ?] and [SURE?] flash.  
This indication asks you if you wish to set a new Program  
(Program 2).  
5, 6, 7  
4
44.1kHz  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 automatically enters [Title Edit ?] menu in SETUP  
mode. You can enter a title for Program 2. ([t] and [?]  
flash alternately.)  
1. Turn on the power to the FD-8 and a connected SCSI  
drive.  
If you prefer the default name, press the EXIT/NO key.  
2. Insert a formatted disk into the SCSI drive.  
The FD-8 displays [Initial..], [(SCSI drive name and ID  
number)], [(Recording mode, such as [Normal])], then  
the top of ABS Time Base (ABS 0).  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The current Program is [PGM 01]. [#0001] is the default  
name of PGM 01.  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
A default title (#0002) appears on the display, with [#]  
and [SURE?] flashing. This means that you can enter a  
name for the new Program.  
If you wish to name the Program with a unique title,  
continue the steps below.  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
In either case, you can change the title later, as explained  
in “Editing a Program title.”  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
7. When you finish entering the title, press the  
EXECUTE/YES key.  
To enter a title:  
• Turning the JOG dial will enter a character or number  
at the location of the flashing cursor. You can enter up  
to 16 characters, nine of which will appear on the display.  
Program 2 (PGM 02) and its title are set.  
The display shows the ABS Time Base indication of the  
Program.  
• To move the flashing cursor, press the HOLD/> key,  
the REWIND button, or the F FWD button. The F FWD  
button is the most convenient.  
<Important!>  
• When you create a new Program by selecting the [New PGM ?]  
menu, a new Program is created with an increment number.  
That is, if only one Program exists and when you create a new  
Program, it will be named Program 2.  
• You can enter the following characters and numbers:  
If Programs 1-5 already exist, a new Program number will be 6.  
• If there is insufficient recording space on the disk, you cannot  
create the new Program. Each time you create a new Program,  
the recordable area on the disk will decrease.  
Using a Program Change function  
If multiple Programs exist on the disk, you need to select a Program to record, play, or edit. This section describes  
how to select a Program.  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
Note: You cannot use the Program Change function when the  
FD-8 is in SETUP mode.  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
1
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the desired Program  
number (flashing).  
Rotating the JOG dial counter-clockwise decreases the  
number, and rotating it clockwise increases the number.  
If you turn the JOG dial clockwise all the way, [New PGM?]  
will be selected. Select [New PGM ?] to create a new  
Program as mentioned in the previous section “Creating  
a new Program.”  
For example, you can select one of seven Programs as  
follows:  
3
2
PGM 05  
New PGM  
PGM 02 PGM 03 PGM 04  
PGM 06 PGM 07  
PGM 01  
You can select from PGM 03 up to  
New PGM in this direction.  
You can select up to PGM  
01 in this direction.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The ABS Time Base indication for the selected Program  
appears. In this way, you can be sure to select a Program  
before you start working.  
1. When the FD-8 is stopped, press the STORE key  
while holding down the HOLD/> key.  
[Select PGM] appears on the display briefly, then changes  
to a flashing “01” ([#0001 of PGM 01) and [SURE?] flash.  
([#0001] is the default name of PGM 01.)  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
Deleting a Program  
This section explains how to delete an unnecessary Program.  
Deleting an unnecessary Program will expand the recordable area, making your work flow more smoothly, since  
recording or editing requires sufficient recordable area (free space on the disk). Use the [Del. PGM ?] menu in  
SETUP mode to delete a Program.  
1. Press the SETUP key while the FD-8 is stopped.  
<Notes on deleting a Program>  
The FD-8 enters SETUP mode, and displays the first  
hierarchy of the SETUP menu that was displayed before  
you turned off the power.  
• You can delete only the currently-selected Program. Refer to  
the previous section, “Using a Program Change function,” for  
information on how to select the desired Program before you  
proceed to delete the Program.  
The default setting is [Sign. Set ?] menu (setting a time  
signature).  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
• If only one Program exists and you try to delete it, data contained  
in the Program will be deleted, but the Program itselfwill remain.  
For example, assume that PGM 01 -07 exist and you try to delete  
PGM 05. Program number 05 will remain, but the data inside PGM  
05 will be replaced with the data of PGM 06.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The subsequent Programs’ data will move in the same way.  
Therefore, it will appear that PGM 07 has been deleted.  
If you delete the last Program (PGM 07 in this example), PGM  
07 will be completely deleted.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy of the  
[Del. PGM ?] (deleting a Program) menu.  
Alternatively, you can use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND  
button, or the F FWD button.  
PGM 05  
PGM 02 PGM 03 PGM 04  
PGM 06 PGM 07  
PGM 01  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
If you try to deleted PGM 05, only the  
data of PGM 05 will be deleted and  
the data of PGM 06 will move into  
PGM 05.  
PGM  
After deleted  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
PGM 05  
PGM 02 PGM 03 PGM 04  
PGM 06  
PGM 01  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Note: You cannot use the Undo/Redo function to delete  
Programs. Make sure that you delete the correct  
Program.  
The number of the Program to be deleted appears and  
[SURE ?] flashes.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
PGM  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the delete operation, press the EXIT/NO key while  
[SURE ?] is flashing. Each time you press the button or key, the  
FD-8 will return to a higher level in the hierarchy, and finally exit  
SETUP mode.  
1
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
When the FD-8 displays [Deleting...] and finishes  
deleting the Program, the data of the next Program  
number moves in, and its ABS time appears.  
3, 4  
2
• To check the REMAIN time and free space, press the DISP SEL  
key to display the [REMAIN] indication after the Program is deleted.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Programs  
Editing a Program title  
You can name the Program as explained in the “Creating a new Program” section. You can also change the title  
later by using the [Title Edit ?] menu in SETUP mode.  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Note: You can edit the title of the selected Program before you  
The currently-selected Program title appears with the left-  
most character flashing.  
select SETUP mode. You cannot select a Program after the FD-8  
enters SETUP mode. Be sure to select the desired Program using  
the steps explained in the “Using the Program Change function”  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
section.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
4
4. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor, and use  
the JOG dial to enter characters or numbers.  
To move the flashing cursor, press the HOLD/> key, the  
REWIND button, or the F FWD button. The F FWD button  
is the most convenient.  
1
You can enter up to 16 characters, nine of which will  
appear on the display.  
You may enter the following characters and numbers:  
3, 5  
2, 4  
4
1. Press the SETUP key while the FD-8 is stopped.  
The FD-8 enters SETUP mode and displays the first  
hier archy level of the SETUP menu that was selected  
before you turned off the power.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
5. After you enter the title, press the EXECUTE/YES  
key.  
The new title is confirmed, and the ABS time value of the  
Program appears.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy level  
of the [Title Edit ?] ([t] and [?] flash alternately.)  
menu.  
The currently-selected Program number also appears.  
You can also use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or  
the F FWD button to select the first hierarchy level  
display.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback in Vari Pitch Mode  
Playback in Vari Pitch Mode  
This chapter explains how to change the playback speed of the recorder using the Vari Pitch function.  
You can set Vari Pitch in the range of +6.0% to -6.0% in 0.1% steps. The VARI PITCH key turns Vari Pitch  
mode on and off.  
5
2, 7, 8  
6
5
4
1
3
6. After you set the pitch data, press the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-8 exits from Vari Pitch data edit mode and  
continues playing with the Vari Pitch you just set.  
1. Press the PLAY button to play the FD-8.  
2. Press the VARI PITCH key.  
The [VARI PITCH] indicator lights up on the display,  
indicating that Vari Pitch mode is turned on.  
7. To turn off Vari Pitch mode, press the VARI PITCH  
key. (The [VARI PITCH] indicator turns off.)  
Vari Pitch mode is cancelled, and the FD-8 resumes  
playback at normal speed.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
VARI PITCH  
8. If you wish to play back data at the current Vari  
Pitch again, press the VARI PITCH key to turn the  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
mode on.  
You can turn the Vari Pitch function on and off and edit  
the pitch data while the FD-8 is playing or stopped, but  
not during recording.  
VARI PITCH lights up to indicate Vari Pitch  
mode is turned on.  
However, if the Vari Pitch function has already been  
turned on and the pitch data was specified before you  
start recording, the FD-8 will record using the current  
Vari Pitch.  
3. Press the VARI PITCH key again while holding down  
the SHIFT key.  
The FD-8 enters Vari Pitch data edit mode, and the  
current pitch data flashes on the display.  
<Notes>  
* Even if the pitch data is 0.0% (no speed change), pressing the  
VARI PITCH key will turn on the [VARI PITCH] indicator on the  
display. In other words, the [VARI PITCH] display indicates that  
the Vari Pitch function is turned on.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
%
The current pitch  
data flashes.  
.
VARI PITCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
CLK  
* The Vari Pitch function is automatically turned off and the [VARI  
PITCH] indicator is turned off under the following conditions:  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
•You have turned on the power to the FD-8. (The pitch data  
will be reset to 0.0%.)  
4. Set the desired pitch data using the JOG dial.  
• You have set “Slave mode setting” in SETUP mode to ON.  
(The pitch data previously set will be maintained.  
You can hear the changes in playback speed.  
5. To adjust the monitor sound, use the corresponding  
channel MON MIX section.  
• You have specified a track for “Digital input track setting” in  
SETUP mode, and [DIGITAL] lights up on the display. (The  
pitch data previously set is retained.)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to a Metronome Sound  
Recording to a Metronome Sound  
This chapter explains how to record your performance while you are playing an instrument accompanied by  
a metronome based on the time signature and tempo specified in the Tempo Map. The metronome sound is  
output from track 8.  
For example, record the acoustic guitar using a microphone to track 2 while using a compressor/limiter.  
•
•
Initialize the FD-8 before the operation.  
If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired Program.  
Connecting a sound source and a effect unit  
1. Connect a microphone to input jack 7.  
If the microphone has a balanced (XLR) connector, use INPUT 7 (XLR) jack on the rear panel.  
2. Connect a compressor/limiter to INSERT jack 7 on the rear panel.  
The compressor/limiter will be applied to channel 3 signal.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FD-8 front panel  
Acoustic guitar  
Monitoring headphone  
Microphone  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
If the microphone has a  
balanced (XLR) connector,  
use INPUT 7 (XLR) jack on  
the rear panel.  
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
2
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
R
8
INSERT  
7
DATA  
IN  
POWER  
SCSI  
FD-8 rear panel  
Compressor/Limiter  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
Punch In/Out Recording  
What is Punch In/Out recording?  
Punch In/Out recording enables you to record over previously-recorded parts. See the diagram below.  
For example, using the Punch In/Out function allows you to change an unsatisfactory guitar solo.  
The FD-8 offers two types of Punch In/Out functions. One is called Auto Punch In/Out, in which you automatically  
re-record a specified part. The other is called Manual Punch In/Out, in which you record data manually (using  
your foot to operate an optional foot switch, model 8051).  
Both functions feature “Rehearsal mode” to enable you to practice repeatedly until you are ready.  
Punch In point  
Punch Out point  
• Select a Program for Punch In/Out recording.  
• Initialize the FD-8.  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Note: You can use the Punch In/Out recording only for  
Real tracks 1-8.  
If you wish to use Punch In/Out recording for data on an  
Additional track, first move the data to the Real tracks.  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
Auto Punch In/Out  
To perform Auto Punch In/Out recording, you need to specify the Auto Punch In point (recording start point)  
and the Auto Punch Out point (recording end point).  
Storing the edit points  
Note: Make sure that you specify an Auto Punch In point that  
precedes the Auto Punch Out point. If the Auto Punch Out point  
1. Refer to “Storing the edit points” to set the Auto  
precedes the Auto Punch In point, [Void Out !] appears and you  
Punch In/Out points.  
Store the Auto Punch In point to the AUTO PUNCH IN  
will be unable to perform Auto Punch In/Out recording.  
key, and the Auto Punch Out point to the AUTO PUNCH  
OUT key.  
Previewing and trimming the edit points  
• Refer to page 66 for more information on storing the edit points.  
You can check the stored edit points by pressing the  
corresponding memory keys to display them on the LCD.  
Auto Punch In point  
(Start point)  
Auto Punch Out point  
(End point)  
You can also change the points if necessary.  
In this example, use the Preview function to fine-tune the  
point while previewing.  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, hold down the SHIFT  
key and press the memory key.  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Pressing the AUTO PUNCH IN key enables you to listen to  
the sound at the AUTO PUNCH IN point (“previewing the  
sound rise [fade-out]”). Pressing the AUTO PUNCH OUT  
key enables you to listen to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH  
OUT point (“previewing the sound fall [fade-in]”).  
Track 1  
2. Trim the edit point while auditioning the sound.  
This part is changed.  
• Refer to page 74 for more information on the Preview function.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
When you finish storing and adjusting the edit points, you can proceed to the Auto Punch In/Out operation.  
In this example, we re-record part of the guitar phrase that was already recorded on track 3.  
First follow the “Preparation” below, then rehearse, and record a take.  
Preparation  
2-F  
2-D  
2-E  
2-C  
2-G  
2-H  
2-A  
2-B  
1
Connecting the instrument  
Setting the mixer section  
1. Connect the guitar to input jack 1.  
Microphones and some instruments require an input level  
adjustment.  
2. Set up the mixer section as follows:  
Channel 1 -> [INPUT]  
INPUT SEL switch  
A
Channel 2-8 -> [OFF]  
Connect these to input jacks 7 and 8 (unbalanced jacks  
on the front panel or balanced connectors on the rear  
panel) that are equipped with the LEVEL switches.  
Channel 1 -> as you wish  
Channel 2-8 -> [0]  
Input fader  
B
C
E
Channel 1 PAN knob  
MON knob  
[L] (Turn all the way to left.)  
Channel 1-8 -> Turn toward [TRK].  
Adjust the track monitor level.  
Channel 1-8 -> Adjust for easier  
monitoring.  
MON PAN knob  
F
MON SELECTOR  
Master fader L/R  
Switch to [MON].  
Rise up to [7-8].  
G
H
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording  
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track assumes input monitoring mode between the Auto Punch In and Out points,  
and the sound is not recorded. You can practice Auto Punch In/Out operation repeatedly before you proceed to  
actual recording. Locate the recording start position slightly before the Auto Punch In point.  
5. When you are satisfied with your rehearsal, press  
<Tips for rehearsal>  
the STOP button.  
Set the preroll value while referring to the “Changing the Initial  
Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter. In this way, the FD-8 can locate  
a point that precedes theAuto Punch In point by the specified preroll  
value. This enables you to start playback slightly before the Punch  
In point. (Refer to page 102 for more information on “Changing the  
Initial Settings.”) The FD-8 will repeat playback data between the  
AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point if you set  
the AUTO RTN START point before the Auto Punch In point and  
the AUTO RTN END point after the Auto Punch Out point. This  
allows you to repeat rehearsal. See the “Hint-2.”.  
<Hint 1>  
Locating a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point  
To locate the playback start point for rehearsal, press the AUTO  
PUNCH IN key, then press the LOCATE key.  
The FD-8 displays the time (position) stored in the AUTO PUNCH  
IN key, and locates the point and stops.  
Press the REWIND button to go backward. If you have set the preroll  
time as described on page 102, you can locate a point that precedes  
the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll value. For more  
information, see “Setting a preroll time” on page 102.  
1. Press the RECORD button while holding down the  
SHIFT key.  
Auto Punch In point  
Stop here.  
Auto Punch Out point  
The [RHSL] indicator flashes in the A.PUNCH mode  
indication area of the display. This means that Auto Punch  
mode is turned on.  
A. PUNCH  
RHSL  
Locate  
Locate  
2. Set the track for Auto Punch In/Out to READY.  
Press the RECORD RACK select key [3/L] to set track 3 to  
READY.  
The FD-8 stops at a point that precedes the Auto  
Punch In point by the specified preroll time. (0 - 10  
seconds)  
3. Start playback on the FD-8 from a point slightly  
before the Auto Punch In point.  
<Hint 2>  
Quick and easy operation for repeated rehearsal  
Rehearsal starts, and the FD-8 operates as follows:  
Using the Auto Return function and the Auto Play function enables  
you to rehearse repeatedly.  
Auto Punch Out point  
(Rehearsal Out)  
Auto Punch In point  
(Rehearsal In)  
Playback  
end point  
Playback  
start point  
As shown below, set the AUTO RTN START and END points for  
Auto Return and Auto Play. In this way, you can repeat rehearsal  
easily, while checking the recording level and concentrating on your  
performance.  
Refer to page 66 for more information on setting the AUTO RTN  
START/END points.  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
This part is changed.  
Auto Punch Out point  
Auto Return End point  
Auto Punch In point  
Auto Return Start point  
Only track 3 in input monitor-  
ing. The sound is not recorded  
at this time. The RECORD  
LED flashes.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Rehearsal area  
Playback starts from the Auto Return Start  
point, and you can rehearse Auto Punch In/  
Out.  
The FD-8 punches in  
automatically at the  
Punch In point.  
The FD-8 punches out  
automatically at the  
Punch Out point.  
When the Auto Return End point is reached, the  
FD-8 locates the Auto Return Start point.  
4. Play the guitar accompanying the playback sound  
from tracks 1 - 8 for rehearsal, while adjusting the  
recording level.  
Note: If the FD-8 display [Over!] when you turn on Auto  
Punch mode, the disk does not have enough free space for  
Auto Punch In/Out. You need to erase part of the Program  
data, then try again.  
You will hear the guitar performance between the Auto  
Punch In and Out points. Otherwise, you will hear the  
recorded guitar sound. Use the channel 1 input fader to  
adjust the recording level of the guitar. Turn the channel  
MON knobs toward [TRK] to adjust the playback level of  
tracks 1-8.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
Auto Punch In/Out Take  
After you are satisfied with your rehearsal, you can proceed to an actual take of Auto Punch In/Out.  
You can undo or redo Auto Punch In/Out recording if you change your mind. The control panel settings are the  
same as those for rehearsal.  
Playback  
start point  
Auto Punch In point  
(Take In)  
Auto Punch Out point  
(Take Out)  
Playback  
end point  
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key [3/L] to set  
track 3 to READY.  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
2. Locate a point slightly before the Auto Punch In  
point.  
This part is changed.  
3. Confirm that Auto Punch mode is turned on.  
If it is not on, press the RECORD button while holding  
down the SHIFT key.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Only track 3 in input  
monitoring, and data will be  
recorded.  
The RECORD LED lights up  
un this area.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
4. Press the RECORD button while holding down the  
PLAY button.  
The flashing [RHSL] on the display changes to an  
illuminated [TAKE], and recording starts.  
A. PUNCH  
The FD-8 punches in  
The FD-8 punches out  
TAKE  
automatically at the  
Auto Punch In point.  
automatically at the  
Auto Punch Out point.  
The FD-8 operates as follows. To record, hold down the  
PLAY button and press the RECORD button.  
5. When you finish recording, press the STOP button.  
• The LED of the REC TRACK select key 3/Lremains steadily  
lit between the Punch In and Out points. Otherwise, it flashes.  
6. Play track 3 to check the result of the Auto Punch  
In/Out operation.  
• When theAuto Punch Out point is passed, the FD-8 cancels  
Auto Punch mode automatically, and nothing appears in the  
A. PUNCH display area.  
<Caution after Punch Out>  
At “Take” of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not  
immediately enter the repro monitor mode from the input  
monitor mode enter the repro monitor mode about two  
seconds after mute playback. This is a functional feature of  
FD-8 and not a malfunction.  
Undo/Redo Auto Punch In/Out recording  
You can undo or redo Auto Punch In/Out recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is complete to restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions that existed after the recording. Follow the notes  
below:  
Note-1: The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-8 is stopped.  
Note-2: The Undo/Redo is not effective if you perform one of the following operations after you finish recording:  
• When a new recording is made.  
• While a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase).  
• When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
• When the power is momentarily switched off.  
• When the program is changed.  
• When the disk is ejected. (Removable disk only.)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
Manual Punch In/Out  
This section explains how to perform Manual Punch In/Out using a foot switch (optional Model 8051).  
You do not need to specify the Punch In/Out points. Instead, you press the foot switch at the Punch In/Out point.  
Manual Punch In/Out also offers rehearsal and actual takes. You can repeat rehearsal until you are ready.  
As an example, replace a part of the recorded guitar solo on track 3.  
• Initialize the FD-8.  
• Select a desired Program for Punch In/Out.  
Preparation  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
SCSI device  
Foot switch Model 8051  
Setting the mixer section.  
Connecting the instrument and a foot  
switch  
3. Set up the mixer control section as explained in  
the “Auto Punch In/Out” section.  
1. Connect the guitar to input jack 1.  
2. Connect an optional foot switch (Model 8051) to the  
PUNCH IN/OUT jack on the rear panel.  
Rehearsing Manual Punch In/Out recording  
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track enters input monitoring mode between the Punch In and Out points (the  
points at which you press the foot switch), and the sound is not recorded. You can practice the Punch In/Out  
operation repeatedly before you proceed to actual recording.  
3. Press the PLAY button to play back from a point  
1. Press the foot switch while holding down the STOP  
slightly before the Punch In point.  
button.  
The FD-8 displays [Rehsl On] for a second and enters  
Rehearsal mode. [RHSL] flashes in the A.PUNCH display  
area.  
4. Play the guitar accompanying the playback of tracks  
1 to 8.  
Follow the instructions in the “Auto Punch In/Out”  
section to adjust the recording level and the monitor level.  
A. PUNCH  
RHSL  
5. Press the foot switch once at the desired Punch In  
2. Press the RECORD TRACK select key [3/L] to set  
point, then press the foot switch again at the desired  
track 3 to READY.  
Punch Out point.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
The FD-8 operates as follows. You will hear your  
performance between the Punch In/Out points.  
Otherwise, you will hear the previously-recorded guitar.  
6. When you finish rehearsing, press the STOP button.  
If you are still unsatisfied, repeat steps 3-5.  
Playback  
start point  
Punch In point  
(Rehearsal In)  
Punch Out point  
(Rehearsal Out)  
Playback  
end point  
Cancelling Rehearsal mode  
Track 8  
1. While holding down the STOP button, press the foot  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
switch.  
[Rehsl Off] appears for a second, the flashing [RHSL]  
indicator in the A. PUNCH display area disappears, and  
Rehearsal mode is cancelled.  
This part is changed.  
<Hint>  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
To rehearse repeatedly, set the AUTO RTN START point slightly  
before the Punch In point, and the AUTO RTN END point slightly  
before the Punch Out point.  
Only track 3 in input  
monitoring.  
The sound is not recorded at  
this time.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
The RECORD LED flashes.  
This will help you concentrate on your performance or check the  
recording level easily (especially since Manual Punch In/Out involves  
operating the foot switch operation as well as the FD-8). (See <Hint-  
2> in the “Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording” for more  
information.)  
Press the foot switch at the  
Punch In point.  
Press the foot switch at the  
Punch Out point.  
Manual Punch In/Out take  
You can proceed to record if you are satisfied with the recording level, foot switch timing, and rehearsal.  
Playback  
start point  
Punch In point  
(Take In)  
Punch Out point  
(Take Out)  
Playback  
end point  
Note: You cannot record a second take during the Manual Punch  
In/Out operation without stopping the FD-8. That is, the FD-8 will  
continue playing after you finish recording a take, but you cannot  
record another take by pressing the foot switch.  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Track 2  
Track 1  
1. Confirm that Rehearsal mode is cancelled, and start  
playing the FD-8 from a point slightly before the  
desired Punch In point.  
This part is changed.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
Only track 3 in input  
monitoring, and data will be  
recorded.  
The RECORD LED lights up  
in this area.  
All tracks are in playback  
monitoring mode.  
2. Play the guitar, accompanying the playback of  
tracks 1 to 8.  
3. Press the foot switch at the desired Punch In point.  
Press the foot switch again at the desired Punch  
Out point.  
The FD-8 will operate as follows. The FD-8 enters  
recording mode at the Punch In point, and cancels  
recording mode at the Punch Out point.  
Press the foot switch at the  
Punch In point.  
Press the foot switch at the  
Punch Out point.  
4. Press the STOP button.  
5. Play track 3 and check the result of Punch In/Out.  
<Caution after Punch Out>  
At “Take” of punch out, the punch-in recording track will not  
immediately enter the repro monitor mode from the input  
monitor mode enter the repro monitor mode about two  
seconds after mute playback. This is a functional feature of  
FD-8 and not a malfunction.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Punch In/Out Recording  
<Hint>  
You can use the PLAY button and the RECORD button, instead of using the foot switch. Follow the steps below.  
This method also does not allow you to record another take unless you stop the FD-8 first.  
Procedure:  
1. Press the PLAY button to start playback from a point slightly before the Punch In point.  
2. Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY button at the desired Punch In point. (Punch In recording  
starts.)  
3. Press the PLAY button at the desired Punch Out point. (Recording is punched out.)  
• If you press only the RECORD button in both steps 2 and 3, you can rehearse Punch In/Out.  
Undo/Redo Manual Punch In/Out recording  
You can undo or redo Manual Punch In/Out recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key after recording is complete to restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording.  
Press the UNDO/REDO key again to restore the conditions that existed after the recording. Follow the notes  
below:  
Note-1: The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-8 is stopped.  
Note-2: The Undo/Redo is ineffective if you perform one of the following operations after you finish recording.  
• When a new recording is made.  
• While a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase).  
• When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD)  
mode.  
• When the power is momentarily switched off.  
• When the program is changed.  
• When the disk is ejected.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to a Metronome Sound  
12  
5
4
Compressor/Limiter  
7, 8, 9  
10  
2
1
11  
3
6
Setting the switch and knob  
Checking the metronome sound  
10. Select the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base using the  
TIME BASE SEL switch.  
1. Set channel 7 LEVEL switch to [L].  
2. Set channel 7 INPUT SEL switch to [INPUT].  
3. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [MON].  
4. Set the RECORD TRACK select key 2/R to READY.  
5. Turn channel 7 PAN knob all the way to [R].  
6. Raise the master fader L/R to [7-8].  
11. Start playback from the beginning of the Program.  
Even if the selected Program does not have any recorded  
data, track 8 outputs the metronome sound and the FD-  
8 counts time.  
12. Turn the MON knob of channel 8 MON mix section  
toward TRK, and turn the MASTER knob in the  
monitor section gradually.  
You will hear the metronome output from track 8 using  
Creating a Tempo Map  
the tempo and time signature set in the Tempo Map.  
7. Set the time signature using the “Setting a time  
signature” menu in SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting a time signature” section on page  
98.  
8. Set a tempo for a given point using the “Setting a  
tempo” in SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting a tempo” section on page 100.  
Turning the Metronome function on  
9. Turn the Metronome function on using the “Setting  
the Metronome function” menu in SETUP mode.  
Refer to the “Setting the Metronome function” section  
onpage 101.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to a Metronome Sound  
Compressor/Limiter  
5, 13  
9
10  
4
6, 12  
5, 13  
2, 8  
3, 11  
1
7
Monitoring the guitar sound and  
adjusting the recording level  
Quitting recording  
9. Press the STOP button to stop the recorder.  
1. Press the RECORD button.  
Track 2 enters input monitoring mode.  
Checking the recorded sound  
2. Play the guitar.  
10. Set the RECORD TRACK select key 2/R to off.  
11. Lower channel 7 input fader.  
3. Adjust the recording level of the guitar sound using  
the channel 7 input fader.  
As you raise the input fader, level meter 2 will respond.  
12. Locate the top of the Program and start playback.  
4. Adjust the output level on the compressor/limiter.  
13. Turn the channel 2 MON knob to the left to check  
the recorded guitar sound.  
5. Adjust the guitar monitoring level using the channel  
2 MON mix section.  
Since the Metronome function still remains on, you can  
hear the metronome sound during playback as you turn  
the channel 8 MON knob.  
Use the channel 2 MON knob to adjust the level, and use  
the MON PAN knob to adjust the stereo image.  
Note: When you finish using the Metronome function, turn the  
Starting recording  
function off in SETUP mode.  
Note: When the Metronome function is on, you cannot record  
6. Locate the top of the Program.  
data on track 8, nor can you play data recorded on track 8.  
7. Hold down the RECORD button and press the PLAY  
button to start recording.  
If you wish to re-record the sound, use the Undo/Redo  
function to re-start recording as explained in the “Basic  
Recording”. Refer to “Quick Operation Guide.”  
8. Play the guitar in time with the metronome.  
The guitar sound is recorded at the recording level  
adjusted in step 3.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
Digital Recording  
Digital recording from an external digital device  
This chapter describes how to digitally record data from a connected digital device (CD, MD, DAT, adat etc.) to  
tracks on the FD-8. Use the “Setting digital input tracks” menu in SETUP mode to assign incoming digital signals  
(DATA IN L/R) to tracks. If you have selected adat input in the “Setting digital input tracks” menu, all eight-track  
data will be digitally recorded from the external adat.  
The currently-selected Program will be used for digital recording. The digital input track assignment is shared by  
all existing Programs.  
Caution: Do not connect or disconnect an optical cable to  
Note: Input a digital source with a sampling rate of 44.1kHz  
or from the DATAIN jack of the FD-8 while a track is assigned  
to the FD-8.  
as digital input. Otherwise, noise may be induced to the FD-  
8, affecting the connected digital device.  
Connecting an external digital device  
When you finish setting the parameters in SETUP mode,  
be sure to press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key to exit  
SETUP mode.  
* Connect the DATAIN jack of the FD-8 with the OPTICAL  
OUT jack of an external digital device using an optical  
cable.  
2. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the  
assigned track to set the track to READY.  
If the digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack as a digital  
output, use a Fostex COP-1 (an optional optical/coaxial converter).  
Starting and quitting recording  
1. Locate the top of the Program.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
2
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
R
8
INSERT  
7
2. Make sure that [DIGITAL] lights up on the display.  
Hold down the RECORD button and press the PLAY  
button to start recording on the FD-8.  
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
DATA IN  
OPTICAL OUT (or adat OUT)  
3. Start playback on the external digital device.  
You do not need to adjust the recording level during  
digital recording. If you are recording data on one of tracks  
1-8, set the monitor SELECTOR to [MON] so that you can  
monitor the recorded signal via the MON mix section of  
the channel that corresponds to the track.  
CD, MD, DAT, adat etc.  
4. When recording is complete, stop the FD-8 and the  
digital device.  
Selecting a Program to record  
Note: While a track is assigned for digital input, you cannot  
use the same track for analog recording via the corresponding  
input jack. When you finish digital recording, set the “Setting  
digital input tracks” menu to [L-, r-] (no assign).  
* If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired  
Program using the Program Change function.  
• See page 34 for more information on Program Change.  
However, in other tracks not assigned for digital input, it is  
possible to record analog signals. For example, if tracks 1  
and 2 (L-1, r-2) are selected for digital inputs, then digital  
signals in tracks 1 and 2, and analog signals in other tracks  
can be recorded, thus making it possible to simultaneously  
record digital and analog signals on all four tracks (If an MO  
disc is used for the current drive, only two tracks can be re-  
corded simultaneously.). Refer to pege 52.  
When the "Setup of the digital input track" is set to "AdAt,"  
please note that tracks 1 ~ 8 will all be assigned to digital  
input and thus, analog signals cannot be recorded in any  
of the tracks.  
Setting a recording track  
1. Select the desired track using the “Setting digital  
input tracks” menu in SETUP mode.  
You can select any track from tracks 1–8 to assign to L or  
R. You can also select [AdAt] instead of tracks 1–8 to  
digitally record all eight-track data from an external adat.  
When a track is assigned and a correct digital signal is  
input, the FD-8 displays [DIGITAL] on the display.  
If incoming digital signal is abnormal, the [DIGITAL]  
indicator flashes. Refer to “Setting digital input tracks”  
in the “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)”  
chapter on page 109.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
Digital recording to an external device  
This section explains how to record digital data from the FD-8 to an external digital device, such as an MD, DAT,  
CD-R, or adat. You can select any pair combination from Real tracks 1–8 and S-T (STEREO OUT L/R output in the  
mixer section) for digital output L and R. You can also output all eight-track data to [adat].  
The current Program is used for digital recording. The digital output track assignment is shared by all existing  
Programs.  
Note: Data in the additional track cannot be directly digital recorded externally. In order to digital output the data in the  
additional track, it must first be transferred to a real track (use the track exchange function). For an explanation of the  
track exchange function, refer to page 61.  
Refer to “Setting digital output tracks” in the “Changing  
Connecting an external digital device  
the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter on page 110  
for more information on setting a digital output track.  
* Connect the DATA OUT jack of the FD-8 with the  
OPTICAL IN jack of an external digital device using  
an optical cable.  
Note: When setting up the digital output track, the tracks  
to be assigned to L and R cannot be the same, such as [L-  
4] and [r-4]. If setup is executed by mistakenly selecting  
the same track numbers for L and R, the number setup for  
the L channel will be given priority and “ ” will be setup  
automatically for R. In other words, L channel will be setup  
to the specified track and R channel will be setup to R of  
STEREO OUT.  
If the digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack as a  
digital output, use an optional COP-1 (optical - coaxial converter).  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
When you finish setting the parameters in SETUP mode, be  
sure to press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key to exit SETUP  
mode.  
DATA OUT  
OPTICAL IN (or adat IN)  
Starting and quitting recording  
1. Locate the top of the Program.  
MD, DAT, CD-R, adat etc.  
2. Start recording on the external digital device.  
3. Press the PLAYbutton on the FD-8 to start playback.  
Digital data is output from the selected track and recorded  
on the external digital device.  
Selecting a Program to record  
* If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired  
Program using the Program Change function.  
4. When recording is complete, stop the FD-8 and the  
digital device.  
Setting a digital output track  
1. Select the desired track using the “Setting digital  
output tracks” menu in SETUP mode.  
You can select any track from tracks 1–8 or L - /r - to  
assign to L or R. You can also select [AdAt] instead of  
these tracks to digitally record all eight-track data to an  
external adat.  
If you assign [L - , r - ] (STEREO OUT L and R), the  
STEREO OUT L/R output of the FD-8 will have priority,  
which enables you to perform digital mixdown as  
described later.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
Digital mixdown  
As described in the previous section, you may mix down digital signals from tracks 1-8 to an external digital  
device using the procedure described in the basic mixdown section, in which you set [L- , r- ] for digital output  
tracks. Refer to the “Basic Multitrack Recording” chapter for information on how to connect effect units.  
Chorus Unit  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
Digital Equipment  
Reverb Unit  
Connecting an external digital device  
Assigning output tracks  
* Connect the DATA OUT jack of the FD-8 with the  
OPTICAL IN jack of an external digital device using  
an optical cable.  
* Use the “Setting digital output tracks” menu in  
SETUP mode to select [L- , r-] as output tracks.  
Refer to “Setting digital output tracks” of the “Changing  
the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” chapter.  
* Input and output of both reverb and chorus are  
connected to the FD-8 AUX SEND 1, 2 and the AUX  
RTN 1, 2.  
5, 12  
Digital Equipment  
Reverb Unit  
Chorus Unit  
10  
7
9
11  
2
1
7
14  
6, 13  
3
4, 8  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
12. Start recording on the master recorder.  
Setting the switch and knob on the FD-8  
Adjust the input level on the master recorder so that its  
level meters indicate almost the same level as the FD-8’s  
level meters L/R.  
1. Set the INPUT SEL switches of channels 1-8 to  
[TRK].  
In this way, the output from recorded tracks 1-8 will be  
routed to the corresponding input channel faders for  
equalization and effect processing.  
13. Press the FD-8’s PLAY button to play the Program  
from the beginning.  
Operate the master faders L/R to fade the mixdown sound  
in and out.  
2. Set the channel PAN knobs accordingly.  
There is no rule on the position of the PAN knobs.  
The settings will vary depending on the type of  
instrument you recorded or the feel of your song.  
You can, for example, pan a given instrument to the left  
and the vocal to right. Follow your intuition.  
Quitting mixdown  
14. Stop the master recorder and the FD-8.  
3. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [L/R].  
4. Raise the master fader L/R to [7-8].  
Setting the output level and the master  
recorder  
5. Set the master recorder to recording standby mode.  
You should be able to check the recording level.  
6. Press the PLAY button to play back the Program  
from the beginning.  
7. Raise the channel faders and gradually turn the  
MASTER knob in the monitor section to monitor  
the sound.  
Use the channel faders to adjust the track playback levels  
while monitoring the sound. At this time, check the level  
meters L and R and adjust the faders so that the [OL]  
section of the meter will not light up with the maximum  
level.  
8. When you obtain a satisfactory balance, use the  
master fader L/R to adjust the final output level.  
Also adjust the input level on the master recorder.  
Settings for the effect units  
9. Turn the AUX knob for the channel signal to which  
you wish to apply effects toward [AUX 1] or [AUX  
2].  
Turn the knob toward [AUX 1] to apply reverberation;  
turn it toward [AUX 2] to apply chorus.  
10. Use theAUX RTN 1 andAUX RTN 2 knobs to adjust  
the input level from the effect units to the stereo  
bus L/R.  
Mixdown  
11. Hold down the STOP button and press the REWIND  
button to locate the beginning of the Program.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
Digital and analog simultaneous recording  
While you are recording S/P DIF digital signals (except for adat digital signal) on some tracks, you can record  
analog signals on other tracks. In this way, you can record two S/P DIF digital inputs (L and R) and two analog  
signals on four tracks.  
This section explains how to record S/P DIF digital signals from CD, MD, or DAT to tracks 1 and 2, and record  
analog signals from a guitar and vocal to tracks 3 and 4. Before recording, initialize the FD-8.  
Note: This type of recording is possible on removable disks (such as an EZ disk, zip disk), fixed disk, or  
optional 2.5-inch internal hard disk. You cannot perform this type of recording if you are using an MO disk  
as the recording media.  
CD, MD, DAT etc.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
SCSI  
R
L
FD-8 rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FD-8 front panel  
Monitoring headphone  
Electric guitar  
Microphone  
Starting the recording Program  
Connecting an external digital device  
and musical instruments  
1. If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired  
recording Program.  
1. Connect the DATA IN jack of the FD-8 with the  
OPTICAL OUT jack of an external digital device  
using an optical cable.  
Setting a recording track  
If the digital device has only the COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack  
1. In the “Setting digital input tracks” menu in SETUP  
mode, set [L-1] and [r-2], then exit SETUP mode.  
Now inputs L and R from the external digital device are  
assigned to tracks 1 and 2.  
as a digital output, use a Fostex COP-1.  
2. Connect the guitar to input jack 1 (or to an empty  
channel).  
When you finish setting the parameters in SETUP mode,  
be sure to press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP key to exit  
SETUP mode.  
3. Connect the microphone to input jack 7 or 8.  
Set the LEVEL switch to L.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Recording  
7, 9, 10, 11  
Digital Device  
7
8
2
4
10  
7
2
1
8
8
1
3
5
6
11  
Settings on the FD-8  
Adjusting the recording level accord-  
ing to the digital input  
1. Set the INPUT SEL switches for channels 1 and 7  
to [INPUT].  
8. While observing the level meter and monitoring the  
digital input sound, adjust the recording level of  
2. Turn channel 1 PAN knob all the way to [L] and  
turn channel 7 PAN knob all the way to [R].  
Now the guitar signal is sent to stereo bus L and the vocal  
signal to stereo bus R.  
the musical instrument and vocal.  
As you raise channels 1 and 7 input faders gradually, the  
level meters 3 and 4 will respond. At this time, adjust  
these input faders so that the meters 3 and 4 will  
respond according to the level of level meters 1 and 2.  
Use channels 3 and 4 MON mix sections to adjust the  
monitoring level of the guitar and vocal sound.  
3. Raise the master faders L/R to [7–8].  
4. Press RECORD RACK select keys 1/L, 2/R, 3/L, and  
4/R to set tracks 1–4 ready for recording.  
9. When you finish adjusting the recording level, stop  
the external digital device and locate the beginning  
of the Program.  
Monitoring digital inputs  
5. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to [MON].  
Four-track simultaneous recording  
6. Press the RECORD button.  
10. Press and hold down the RECORD button, and  
press the PLAYbutton to start recording on the FD-  
The tracks ready for recording enter input monitoring mode.  
8 and start playing the digital device.  
The digital device signal and the guitar and vocal perfor  
mance will be recorded simultaneously.  
7. Play the connected digital device.  
You do not have to adjust the input level from the digital  
device on the FD-8. You can monitor the digital signals  
by turning channels 1 and 2 MON knobs to [TRK], and  
turning the MASTER knob in the monitor section  
gradually. At this time, turn channel 1 MON PAN knob  
all the way to [L], and channel 2 MON PAN knob all the  
way to [R].  
11. When recording is finished, stop the FD-8 and the  
digital device.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack  
The following explains the various functions of the RECORDER IN jack. There are two ways to use the RECORDER  
IN jack.  
1. Synchronizing an external MIDI sound source with the performances recorded on tracks 1 ~ 8 and digitally mixing down a  
maximum of sixteen channels of sound sources.  
2. Directly recording external sound sources without routing them through a mixer.  
Sixteen channels of digital mixdown  
In this method, the RECORDER IN (L, R) jacks of the FD-8 are directly connected to the MON OUT (L, R) jacks and  
the monitor SELECTOR switched to [L/R+MON]. Then, the monitor bus L, R signal and the stereo bus L, R signals  
are both simultaneously output from MON OUT L, R and input to RECORDER IN L, R. As shown in the drawing  
below, an external MIDI sound source is input to INPUT jacks 1~8, and then each channel INPUT fader is raised,  
and performances recorded on tracks 1~8 are applied to each channel MON mix section, and played back using  
MIDI sync of both performances. With this method, a maximum of sixteen channels (Tracks 1~8 and MIDI  
sound) of sound sources are mixed and sent to the RECORDER IN L, R from MON OUT L, R, and digitally mixed  
down in an outboard digital device (DAT).  
DAT  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
MIDI  
Sequencer  
MIDI sound sources  
For details on digital mixdown by synchronizing with a MIDI sound source, please refer to “MIDI clock sync system” of “MIDI  
synchronization” on page 77.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use the RECORDER IN jack  
Direct recording of an external sound source  
Here, an external sound source is directly input to the RECORDER IN jack of the FD-8 and recorded in the  
recorder section without passing through a mixer.  
In this case, if an external input is connected to L and R of the RECORDER IN jack, it will not be possible to record  
through the mixer section.  
In the illustration below, the signal input to L of RECORDER IN is sent to tracks 1, 3, 5,and 7, and the signal input  
to R of RECORDER IN is sent to tracks 2, 4, 6, and 8. Any two tracks are selected for recording. If the connection  
is made from the mixer group out, using a patch bay will faciliate connections from the front panel as shown in  
drawing below. The recording level is adjusted at the external equipment side and, by setting the monitor  
section SELECTOR to [MON] at the FD-8 side, sound can be monitored using the MON mix section of the channel  
corresponding to each track.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
1/L  
2/R  
3/L  
4/R  
5/L  
6/R  
7/L  
8/R  
Real Track 1  
Real Track 2  
Real Track 3  
Real Track 4  
Real Track 5  
Real Track 6  
Real Track 7  
Real Track 8  
RECORDER  
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
2
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
R
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
L
RECORDER IN  
Patch Bay  
Mixer etc.  
R
RECORD TRACK  
SELECT SWITCH  
<More applications for using RECORDER IN>  
If an external sound source is connected to both L and R of RECORDER IN, recording cannot be done via the  
INPUT fader. If only one jack (L or R) is connected, the track corresponding to the jack not connected can be  
recorded simultaneously via the INPUT fader. For example, if sound source E is connected to only L of  
RECORDER IN, another sound source applied via the INPUT fader can be recorded on any one of tracks, 2, 4,  
6, or 8 corresponding to R of RECORDER IN to which nothing is connected. In other words, because the FD-  
8 can simultaneously record two tracks, a sound source from RECORDER IN can be recorded on one track  
and sound source routed via the INPUT fader can be simultaneously recorded on the other track.  
Sound source E  
RECORDER IN L  
Track 8  
Track 7  
Track 6  
Track 5  
Track 4  
Track 3  
Sound sources A, B, C, and D  
Sound source E  
Track 2  
Track 1  
Sound source D  
Sound source C  
Sound source B  
Sound source A  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Editing Tracks  
The FD-8 features speedy, non-linear, non-destructive editing of independent audio tracks and uses a Zip, EZ,  
MO disk or fixed hard disk as the recording media. The following edit functions enable you to edit tracks.  
Press the EDIT key on the control panel to access the edit menu.  
<Edit functions>  
Copy & Paste  
Track Exchange  
You can copy a specific range of data from a specific track and  
paste it to the same or a different track.  
You can swap data between tracks.  
Monaural track data can be swapped between Real tracks 1–8  
andAdditional tracks 9–24. Multiple-track data can be swapped  
between Real tracks 1–8 and Additional tracks 9–16, and  
Additional tracks 17-24 by eight-track unit.  
Move & Paste  
You can move a specific range of data from a specific track and  
paste it to the same or a different track.  
Erase  
You can erase a specific range of data from a specific track or  
from all tracks.  
Note: These edit functions are available for the currently-selected Program. You can perform Copy & Paste, Move & Paste,  
and Erase operations (except for Track Exchange) for data recorded in the Real tracks.  
If the disk contains multiple Programs, you need to select the desired Program first to perform the track edit operation. Do not  
select another Program until you finish the edit operation. Otherwise, you may lose or incorrectly edit another Program.  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste might seem like the same function. However, they are different, as shown in the  
diagram. Remember this difference when you start using these functions.  
• Copy & Paste  
• Move & Paste  
Using the Copy & Paste function enables you to copy a  
specific range of data from a specific track to the clipboard  
as shown below (this is called [Copy Clip] operation on the  
FD-8), then paste the data at a specific point in a specific  
track. The number of copy source tracks and the number of  
destination tracks are the same. That is, if you copy mono  
track data, you can paste it to a mono track. If you copy  
adjacent odd/even tracks (e.g., track 1 and track 2), you can  
paste it to adjacent odd/even tracks. The data on the clipboard  
remains as it is. You can paste it as many times as you wish.  
Move & Paste is almost the same as Copy & Paste.  
As shown in the figure, it allows you to move a specific range  
of data from a specific track to the clipboard (this is called  
[Move Clip] on the FD-8), and paste it to a destination track.  
The difference from Copy & Paste is that the data on the source  
track and the clipboard will be erased when you paste the  
data to the destination. That is, you cannot paste the moved  
data repeatedly.  
CLIPBOARD IN point  
CLIPBOARD OUT point  
Move Clip  
CLIPBOARD OUT point  
CLIPBOARD IN point  
Move source track  
Copy source track  
Copy Clip  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
Paste  
Paste  
Paste destination track  
Paste destination track  
As shown in the drawing, points for copy or move are called the CLIPBOARD IN point for the copy (or move)  
starting point, and CLIPBOARD OUT point for the ending point, and the paste starting point is called the AUTO  
PUNCH IN point.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Follow the steps below to perform the Copy & Paste or Move  
& Paste operation.  
Note: If you select non-adjacent tracks, such as tracks 1 and 3,  
or tracks 1, 2, and 4, the copied (or moved) data will be pasted  
Store the copy (or move) start point (CLIPBOARD IN point),  
end point (CLIPBOARD OUT point), and the paste start point  
(AUTO PUNCH IN point).  
back to the copy (or move) source tracks.  
2. Press the EDIT key repeatedly until [Copy Clip (or  
[Move Clip]) flashes on the display.  
Select [Copy Clip] to execute Copy & Paste.  
Check the stored edit points using the Preview function and  
make adjustments if necessary.  
Select [Move Clip] to execute Move & Paste.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
Specify the copy (or move) source track, and copy (or move)  
the data to the clipboard.  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Specify the destination track and the number of times for the  
paste operation (repeated paste), and execute the paste  
operation.  
The copy or move operation will complete immediately.  
The display briefly indicates [COMPLETED !], then flashes  
the [Copy Paste] message (or the [Move Paste] message).  
The FD-8 enters standby mode for the paste operation.  
The LEDs of the selected RECORD TRACK select keys  
continue to flash.  
Storing the edit points  
1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points  
to the memory keys” section for information on  
storing the copy (or move) start and end points,  
and the paste start point.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This is indicated after copy/clip.  
This is indicated after move/clip.  
Store the copy (or move) start point to the CLIPBOARD IN  
key, the end point to the CLIPBOARD OUT key, and store  
the paste start point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key.  
Note: Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key without selecting a track  
in Step 1 will cause the display to indicate an alarm message [Select  
TRK !]. Select a track, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
• See “Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys” on  
page 66.  
Now the sound data to be pasted has been copied (or  
moved) to the clipboard, you can check the data on the  
clipboard by following the steps below. If there is no  
problem with the data, you can proceed to the paste  
operation.  
Checking and adjusting the edit points  
After you store the edit points, you can check them on the  
display by pressing the corresponding keys. You may also  
adjust the points. This section explains how to preview and  
fine-tune the edit points using the Preview function.  
Checking the clipboard data  
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and  
hold down the SHIFT key and press the memory  
key for which you wish to check the edit point.  
You can preview “fade in” at the CLIPBOARD IN point,  
“fade out” at the CLIPBOARD OUT point, and “fade out”  
at AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
* Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button.  
The FD-8 indicates whether the sound data on the  
clipboard is a copied data or moved data ([Copy Clip] or  
[Move Clip]) and plays the data (this is called clipboard  
playback). The sound being played back can be heard if  
the MON knob of the channel corresponding to the copied  
(or moved) track, is rotated toward “TRK,” and the  
monitor section MASTER knob is raised.  
2. Trim the edit point while previewing.  
• Refer to “Preview Function” on page 74 for more information.  
During playback, the RECORD TRACK LED of the copied  
(or moved) track will blink.  
Executing Copy (or Move)  
* Press the EDIT key again to get ready for the paste  
operation. [Copy Paste] or [Move Paste] flashes on the  
display.  
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy  
(or move) source track to set it READY.  
Select from mono tracks or adjacent odd-even tracks (1-  
2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8).  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Executing Paste  
Undo/Redo Paste  
You can undo or redo a Copy & Paste and Move & Paste  
operation.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
The display indication enables you to set the number of  
the paste operations. The number and [SURE ?] flash.  
At this time, the flashing RECORD TRACK select key LED  
becomes continuously lit.  
• To restore the data that existed prior to the paste operation,  
press the UNDO/REDO key.  
• To restore the pasted data after you undo the paste  
operation, press the UNDO/REDO key again.  
Flashing  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
Note: The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the FD-8 is  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
stopped.  
Note: If you perform one of the following operations after you use  
the Copy & Paste or Move and Paste operation, the Undo/Redo  
5. Select a destination track to paste data.  
All selected tracks’ LEDs light up.  
function will no longer be effective.  
You can select only mono tracks as the destination of a  
copied or moved mono track. If you copied or moved  
adjacent odd-even tracks, you can select only adjacent  
odd-even tracks as the destination.  
1. When a new recording is made.  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste, Move &  
Paste, Erase).  
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO PUNCH  
IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD) mode.  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
If you do not select any tracks, the data will be pasted  
back to the copy or move source track.  
6. Turn the JOG dial to enter the number of repeats  
(Repeat=**).  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
You can enter up to 99. However, this is automatically  
limited by the available recording space on the disk.  
That is, if the disk has enough free space, you can set up  
to 99 repeats. If the disk has only a small amount of free  
space, the JOG dial allows you to set a lower number of  
repeats.  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Copy Paste] (or [Move Paste]) flashes and the duration  
of the pasted data appears as a negative number on the  
display. This number will count down as the paste  
operation proceeds.  
When the paste operation is complete, the flashing [Copy  
Paste] (or [Move Paste]) lights up continuously, and  
[COMPLETED !] is displayed.  
Note: If you try to execute the paste operation by pressing the  
EXECUTE/YES key when the disk has insufficient free space, [Over  
!] appears on the display and edit mode is cancelled. In this case,  
you need to delete unnecessary data or Programs. Refer to the  
following section, “Erase,” and to “Deleting a Program” on page 35  
for more information on erasing.  
8. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-8 exits edit mode and displays the previous Time  
Base indication.  
9. Turn off the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy  
(or move) source track.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Erase  
There are two methods for erasing data. Understand the difference between these methods before you use the  
Erase function.  
* If multiple Programs are set on the disk, first select the desired Program. Do not select another Program until  
you finish the erase operation.  
• Erasing a specified part of the data between ABS 0 and  
REC END  
• Erasing data from a specified point to REC END  
You may erase all data in the range from a specified point to  
REC END in the currently-selected Program. You can erase  
data on a mono real track or multiple real tracks. To erase  
data on an additional track, you need to move the data to a  
real track, then erase it.  
You may erase a specified part of the data between ABS 0  
and REC END (the end point of the recording) in the currently-  
selected Program. (The erased part is replaced with silence.)  
You can erase data on a mono real track or multiple real tracks.  
To erase data on an additional track, you need to move the  
data to a real track, then erase it. As shown below, the REC  
END point (the end point of recording) is not affected.  
The erased area is replaced with silence. As a result, the  
REMAIN time and space will increase. (You will have more  
recordable space on the disk.)  
When you erase all tracks’ data, the REC END point will move  
backward. However, if you erase data on a mono track or  
multiple tracks (but not all tracks), the REC END point may  
not be affected. (Refer to the note below.) After the erase  
operation, the REMAIN time and space will increase.  
REC END  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
Any real track  
Any real track  
Any real track  
Any real track  
ERASE  
Silence  
ERASE  
Silence  
REC END  
ABS 0  
REC END  
ABS 0  
Note: If all real tracks contain data as shown below, erasing data on tracks 1 and 2 will not affect the position of REC END.  
On the other hand, if all Real tracks contain data as shown below, erasing data on tracks 3 - 8 will move up REC END to the  
end point of tracks 1 and 2.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
(REC END)  
(REC END)  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Real tracks  
Real tracks  
ABS 0  
ABS 0  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
ERASE  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Real tracks  
Real tracks  
ERASE  
ERASE  
REC END  
ABS 0  
REC END  
ABS 0  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Follow the steps below to erase data:  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The flashing [Erase] message lights up steadily, and  
[SURE ?] flashes.  
Store the erase start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point) and the  
erase end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT point).  
SURE ?  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
Flashing  
Use the Preview function to check the stored edit points and  
adjust them if necessary.  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
• To cancel the erase operation, press the STOP button or the  
EXIT/NO key while [SURE ?] flashes on the display.  
Specify a track to erase and execute the function.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key again.  
The FD-8 starts erasing the data and [Erase ....] flashes.  
When the erase operation is completed, [COMPLETED !]  
lights up.  
Storing the edit points  
1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points  
to the memory keys” section for information on  
storing the erase start and end points.  
5. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The FD-8 exits edit mode and displays the previous Time  
Base indication.  
Store the erase start point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key,  
and the end point to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.  
• To erase the data in its entirety from the tracks, you can also  
use the Program Delete function to erase the entire Program.  
In either case, you can expand the recordable area on the disk.  
Use either one of the erase operations to erase unnecessary  
dataiftheFD-8displaysanalarmmessageindicatinginsufficient  
recordable space forAuto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste, or Move  
& Paste.  
• If you wish to erase the data from a specific point, store the REC  
END or later point as the erase end point. Refer to the <Note> for  
information on storing the REC END point.  
• See “Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys” on  
page 66.  
• Refer to “Deleting a Program” on page 35 for more information  
on the Program Delete function.  
Checking and adjusting the edit points  
After you store the edit points, you can check them on the  
display by pressing the corresponding keys.  
You may also adjust the points.  
Undo/Redo Erase  
You can undo or redo the Erase operation.  
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and  
hold down the SHIFT key and press the memory  
key for which you wish to check the edit point.  
You can preview “fade-out” at the AUTO PUNCH IN point  
and “fade-in” at AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
•To restore the data that existed before you erased it, press the  
UNDO/REDO key.  
•To restore the data after you undo the Erase operation, press  
the UNDO/REDO key again.  
When you press the UNDO/REDO key, the FD-8 will undo or  
redo the operation immediately, and display [Undo!] or [Redo !]  
and [COMPLETED !].  
2. Trim the edit point while previewing.  
•Refer to “Preview Function” on page 74 for more information.  
Note: The Undo/Redo function is effective only when the  
FD-8 is stopped.  
Executing Erase  
Note: If you perform one of the following operations after  
you use the Copy & Paste or Move and Paste operation, the  
Undo/Redo function will no longer be effective.  
1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the track  
to erase to set it READY.  
You can select a mono track, multiple tracks, or all tracks.  
1. When a new recording is made.  
2. When a new editing is executed (such as Copy & Paste,  
Move & Paste, Erase).  
2. Press the EDIT key repeatedly until [Erase] flashes  
on the display.  
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when the AUTO  
PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY (or RECORD)  
mode.  
Flashing  
4. When the power is momentarily switched off.  
5. When the program is changed.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
6. When the disk is ejected.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Track Exchange  
The Track Exchange function enables you to swap mono track data or multiple track data of the current Program  
between Real tracks and Additional tracks in units of single or multiple tracks.  
You can swap mono track data between Real tracks, Additional tracks, or between a Real track and an Additional  
track. You can swap multiple track data between eight Real tracks (1–8) and Additional tracks (9–16 or 17–24).  
Refer to the diagrams below for information on how data on the tracks can be moved using this function.  
The Track Exchange function also enables you to move Real track data to an empty Additional track (to empty  
the original Real track) so that you can use the Real track for a new recording. This capability lets you use tracks  
more flexibly.  
You need to move data on an Additional track back to a Real track to audition the data, since data on an  
Additional track cannot be played in real-time.  
You can also use this function when you wish to check the REC END point of an Additional track, as described in  
the “Erase” section.  
Swapping multiple track data between eight Real tracks  
and eight Additional tracks (9–16 or 17–24)  
Swapping mono track data between Real tracks, Addi-  
tional tracks, or between a Real track and an Additional  
track.  
Real Tracks 1-8  
AdditionalTracks 9-16  
Additional Tracks 17-24  
Real Tracks 1-8  
AdditionalTracks 9-16  
Additional Tracks 17-24  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Tracks  
Executing Track Exchange  
• Swapping mono track data between any two tracks  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the EDIT key  
repeatedly until [TRK Exchg] flashes on the display.  
Alternatively, you can press the EDIT key, then use the  
JOG dial.  
1. When [1-8] is flashing, turn the JOG dial.  
Turning the JOG dial allows you to select a mono  
track from [1], [2], [3], [4]........ [24] in the left column.  
The right column continues a mono track.  
For example, if you select [4] in the left column, the  
display indicates [4<>1], meaning you can swap data  
between tracks 4 and 1.  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the track selection.  
The current display shows that you can swap eight-track  
data between Real tracks 1-8 and Additional tracks 9-16.  
If you wish to select other tracks, follow the steps below.  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
44.1kHz  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Flashing  
2. To select a number in the right column, press  
the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F  
FWD button to move the flashing cursor to the  
right column, then use the JOG dial to select  
the desired number.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Select the tracks to swap data.  
* When you swap data between mono tracks, the  
indications [4<>1] and [1<>4], for example, mean the  
same thing — swapping data between tracks 1 and 4.  
• Selecting Real tracks 1-8 and Additional tracks 17-24:  
1. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or  
the F FWD button to move a flashing cursor on  
[1-8] (left) to [9-16](right).  
Note: If you select the same tracks for swapping mono  
track data, the setting is ignored. The FD-8 will indicate  
[Select Err] for a short moment, then return to the previous  
display.  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Exchange] lights up and the swapping operation is  
completed immediately.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The FD-8 indicates [COMPLETED !], then returns to the  
previous Time Base display.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to change flashing [9-16] to  
flashing [17-24].  
* You cannot play data or check the REC END point on the  
Additional tracks. To do so, you need to move the data to a  
Real track.  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
If you load back-up data from the external DAT recorder,  
adat machine, or backup SCSI drive, the data maintains the  
same condition as when you previously saved it to DAT,  
adat, or backup SCSI drive.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cue & Review Function  
Cue & Review Function  
This chapter explains how to use the “Cue & Review function” with the REWIND button, the F FWD button, and  
the JOG/SHUTTLE feature, and also explains digital Scrubbing with the scrub mode function. Using this function  
enables you to fast forward or rewind at different speeds while the recorder section is playing or stopped.  
During a cue and review operation, you will hear the sound recorded on the disk, which makes it easy for you to  
locate the desired point.  
Cue & Review function using the REWIND and F FWD buttons  
You may cue & review the audio data at three-times speed while the recorder is playing.  
3
2
3
5
1, 4, 6  
1. Press the PLAY button to play the audio data.  
5. Press the REWIND button instead of the F FWD  
button.  
2. Press the F FWD button during playback.  
[FWD>] appears on the display, and the FD-8 cues in the  
forward direction at three-times speed.  
[<RWD] appears on the display, and the FD-8 cues in the  
reverse direction at three-times speed.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
44.1kHz  
M
S
F
SF  
ABS  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
M
S
F
SF  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
6. Press the PLAY button to restore the original  
playback speed.  
3. To adjust the monitor sound, use the corresponding  
channel MON mix section.  
4. Press the PLAY button again to restore the original  
play back speed.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cue & Review Function  
Digital scrubbing using SCRUB mode  
You may perform digital scrubbing while the recorder section is stopped.  
4
2
1
4
3
5
1. Press the SCRUB key while the recorder section is  
stopped.  
3. Turn the JOG dial to perform digital scrubbing.  
The envelope of data recorded on the selected track ap  
pears during digital scrubbing.  
The SCRUB key’s LED lights up. The FD-8 enters Scrub  
mode and displays [Select TRK], instructing you to select  
the desired track.  
<Turning the JOG dial in the forward direction>  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
t
Note: You can select one track at a time. If you try to  
select two or more RECORD TRACK select keys, the  
FD-8 will ignore your operation.  
playback point  
<Turning the JOG dial in the reverse direction>  
44.1kHz  
2. Press the desired RECORD TRACK select key to  
select a track for digital scrubbing.  
ABS  
M
S
F
SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
The screen changes, indicating that the recorder is in  
“STILL” status (Scrub mode is “still”). (The selected  
RECORD RACK key’s LED flashes.)  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
t
44.1kHz  
playback point  
ABS  
M
S
F
SF  
4. To adjust the monitor sound, use the corresponding  
channel MON mix section.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
5. Press the STOP button to cancel digital scrubbing.  
Scrub mode is cancelled, and the SCRUB LED and the  
RECORD TRACK LED turn off.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cue & Review Function  
Cue & Review function using the SHUTTLE feature  
You may cue and review data at a speed from normal to 64-times speed, using the SHUTTLE feature while the  
recorder is playing.  
3
4
2
3
1
1. Press the PLAY button to start playback.  
3. To adjust the monitor sound, use the corresponding  
channel MON mix section.  
2. Hold down the SHIFT key and turn the JOG dial  
clockwise or counter-clockwise.  
4. Release the SHIFT key to cancel the cue and review  
operation.  
Turning the JOG dial clockwise will change the cueing  
speed. Turning the JOG dial counter-clockwise will change  
the reviewing speed.  
The recorder resumes playback at the original speed.  
The FD-8 displays the selected cue or review speed, which  
you can select from normal, two-times, four-times, eight-  
times, 16-times, 32-times, and 64-times speed.  
As long as you are holding down the SHIFT key, playback  
continues at the selected speed.  
Note: The cue and review operation does not affect pitch.  
Because the FD-8 performs this function by skipping part of  
data during playback.  
44.1kHz  
Note: When the beginning of the disk is reached during  
the review operation, the FD-8 starts normal playback, even  
if you are still holding down the SHIFT key. When the end of  
the disk (ABS time: 23H 59M 59S) is reached during the  
cue operation, the FD-8 stops and the PLAY button LED  
flashes.  
ABS  
M
S
F
SF  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Display of 16-times review>  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Display of 32-times cue>  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
You can store time information (time or bar/beat/clock) in each memory key.  
The stored time information will be used to locate a point in data in the recorder section, or as an edit point to  
perform the Auto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase function.  
This chapter describes how to store data in the memory keys and edit the stored data.  
Data stored in the memory keys is used in the following operations:  
* Locating the AUTO PUNCH IN point.  
* Recording start point for the Auto Punch In/Out operation.  
* Paste start point for the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation.  
* Erase start point for the Erase operation.  
AUTO PUNCH IN key  
* Locating the AUTO PUNCH OUT point.  
* Recording end point for the Auto Punch In/Out operation.  
* Erase end point for the Erase operation.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT key  
CLIPBOARD IN key  
* Locating the CLIPBOARD IN point.  
* Copy start point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the  
Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation.  
* Locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point.  
* Copy end point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the  
Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation.  
CLIPBOARD OUT key  
* Locating the AUTO RTN START point.  
AUTO RTN START key  
AUTO RTN END key  
* Locate end point from AUTO RTN END in Auto Return or Auto Repeat  
modes.  
* Locating the AUTO RTN END point.  
* Locate start point to AUTO RTN START in Auto Return or Auto Repeat  
modes.  
<Note on storing the locate point>  
When you set the IN/OUT points for Auto Punch In/Out, IN/OUT points for Copy & Clip/Move  
& Clip, and START/END points forAuto Return/Auto Repeat, make sure that IN points precede  
the OUT points and START points precede the END points.  
• You can store locate points for each Program. (You need to select a Program first.)  
• The data can be also saved or loaded even after the Song data is saved or loaded.  
• All locate points stored in the memory keys will be maintained after you turn off the FD-8.  
In addition to the memory keys, you can store data in the LOCATE key in real-time.  
The LOCATE key always stores the point most recently located by the FD-8.  
That is, data in the LOCATE key is overwritten by new data each time the FD-8 locates a  
point. You can also edit the data in the LOCATE key. Refer to the following pages for  
more information on how to edit data.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys  
• Select the desired Time Base using the TIME BASE SEL key if you wish to use a Time Base other than ABS.  
• The stored or edited locate points are used only in the currently-selected Program.  
Storing in real-time  
You can store the locate point (in the ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base) in real-time while the FD-8 is  
playing.  
4
1
2
3
1. Press the PLAY button to play back data.  
• If you set “BAR/BEAT Resolution mode” in SETUP mode  
to ON, the FD-8 will round off the CLK value of the captured  
bar/beat/clock value. That is, the locate point will be at the  
beginning of the beat (00). Refer to page 111 for more  
information.  
2. When the point you wish to store is reached, press  
the HOLD/> key.  
The time value or bar/beat/clock value of the point is  
captured. The FD-8 enters data edit mode.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
4. Press the desired memory key.  
The STORE LED turns off.  
The captured time value (or bar/beat/clock value) is  
stored in the memory key. After the data is stored, the  
FD-8 displays the previous Time Base and continues  
playback.  
• You can omit Step 2 above to speed operation.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
Editing and storing locate data  
If you know the position of the desired locate point, follow the steps below.  
4
2
1, 2  
3
2
1. Press the HOLD/> key while the FD-8 is stopped.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
The currently-displayed time value (or bar/beat/clock  
value) is captured and the FD-8 enters data edit mode.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
4. Press the desired memory key.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor on the  
time value digit, and use the JOG dial to increase  
or decrease the value.  
The STORE LED turns off.  
The input time value (or bar/beat/clock value) is stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
• Press the STORE key instead of the HOLD/> key in Step  
1 above and omit Step 3 to speed operation.  
Editing and storing data  
You can recall data stored in the memory key, edit it, and store it. again  
1, 4  
2
3
2
2
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the memory key  
that stores the data you wish to edit.  
The stored data appears on the display and the FD-8  
enters data edit mode.  
• You can store the edited data in a memory key other than the  
one you pressed when you recalled the data.  
For example, you can recall the AUTO PUNCH IN point data,  
edit it, and store it to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor to the  
time value digit, and use the JOG dial to increase  
or decrease the value.  
• Refer to page 41 for more information on Auto Punch In/Out.  
• Refer to pages 56 and 59 for more information on Copy &  
Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase.  
• Refer to page 70 for more information on Auto Return and  
Auto Repeat.  
3. Press the STORE key.  
The STORE LED lights up.  
• You can also use the Preview function to edit the stored locate  
points (edit points). Refer to “Preview Function” on page 74 for  
more information.  
4. Press the memory key that you pressed in Step 1  
again.  
The STORE LED will turn off. The edited data is stored,  
and the FD-8 displays the previous Time Base indication.  
Editing the data stored in the LOCATE key  
You can recall the last located point and edit the value. You can use the edited value to locate the point later or  
store it to another memory key.  
4
3
2
2
2
1
1. Press the SHIFT and LOCATE keys simultaneously  
while the FD-8 is stopped.  
3. To located the edited point, press the LOCATE key.  
When you execute the Locate function, the locate point is  
stored as locate data in the LOCATE key.  
The last located point stored in the LOCATE key appears  
on the display and the FD-8 enters data edit mode.  
If no data is stored (that is, if the FD-8 has not located  
any point since the power was turned on), 00H 00M 00S  
00F 00SF appears and “00” of the digits “00S” flashes.  
4. To store the edited data to another memory key,  
input the desired value, press the STORE key, then  
press the desired memory key.  
The data is stored to the corresponding memory key.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor to the  
time value digit, and use the JOG dial to increase  
or decrease the number to the desired value.  
The data stored in the LOCATE key will not change.  
Note: You cannot preview the data stored in the LOCATE  
key, unlike other memory keys.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
Locate Function  
The FD-8 locates the desired edit point immediately (that is, it moves the current position of the data in the  
recorder section). Locate points include edit points (in ABS time, MTC time, or in bar/beat/clock) that are stored  
for the Copy, Move, Paste, Erase, and Auto Punch In/Out operations.  
They also include the top of a Program (ABS 0), the recording end point in a Program (REC END), and a direct  
locate point for which you can specify the time.  
You can also use the Auto functions, such as Auto Play, Auto Return, and Auto Repeat, with the Locate function.  
Direct Locate  
The Direct Locate function enables you to locate the following points:  
• Locate a specified point  
• Locate the beginning of the Program (LOCATE ABS 0)  
Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button.  
The FD-8 will immediately locate the beginning of the currently-  
selected Program.  
Refer to “Editing and storing locate data” in the chapter “Storing a  
Locate Point (Edit Point)” for information on how to edit the data and  
on pressing the LOCATE key instead of the STORE key. The point  
at specified time value (or bar/beat/clock value) will be located  
immediately.  
• Locate the recording end point of the Program (LOCATE  
REC END)  
• Locate the last-located point  
Press the F FWD button while holding down the STOP button. The  
FD-8 will immediately locate the end point of the currently-selected  
Program.  
Press the LOCATE key.  
Since the LOCATE key always stores the last-located point  
(excluding LOCATEABS 0 and LOCATE REC END), just press the  
LOCATE key to locate the last-located point again.  
• Locate the position stored in one of the memory keys  
Press the desired memory key, then press the LOCATE key.  
The FD-8 will locate the point (edit point) stored in the corresponding  
memory key immediately.  
Auto Play  
The Auto Play function allows the FD-8 to start play back automatically from the located point. AUTO PLAY mode  
should be turned on before you execute the Direct Locate function described above.  
Note: This function is effective within 24 ABS hours. Therefore, if playback continues over the recording end point, the  
FD-8 will still continue counting the time. Also, when the FD-8 locates ABS REC END, it will continue counting the time  
from the recording end point. (However, the FD-8 does not access the disk after reaching the recording end point.)  
<Example: Operation at locating to the AUTO PUNCH IN point.>  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
PLAYBACK  
PLAYBACK  
LOCATE  
LOCATE  
START  
LOCATE  
LOCATE  
START  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
Executing the Auto Play function  
2
3
1
1. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on  
the [PLAY] indicator on the bottom of the display.  
• You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP  
mode so that the FD-8 will start playback preroll time before  
the locate point.  
AUTO  
PLAY  
You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to  
the chapter “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)”  
on page 102.  
2. Press the desired memory key.  
3. Press the LOCATE key.  
The FD-8 locates the point and plays as shown in the  
diagram.  
Auto Return  
This function allows the FD-8 to play data up to the AUTO RTN END point, then automatically locate the AUTO  
RTN START point as shown in the diagram below.  
To enable this function, AUTO RTN mode should be on and the AUTO RTN START point and AUTO RTN END point  
should already be set.  
<Operation of the Auto Return mode.>  
AUTO RTN END point  
AUTO RTN START point  
PLAYBACK  
PLAYBACK  
START  
Automatic locating to the AUTO RTN START point  
subsequent to playback to the AUTO RTN END point.  
LOCATE  
STOP  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
Executing the Auto Return function  
1
2
3
3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN END  
point.  
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END  
points.  
The FD-8 operates as shown in the diagram.  
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”  
on page 66 for information on storing the desired points  
in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END  
key.  
• You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP  
mode so that the FD-8 will start playback preroll time before  
the locate point. You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10  
seconds. Refer to the chapter “Changing the Initial Settings  
(SETUP Mode)” on page 102.  
2. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on  
the [RTN] indicator at the bottom of the display.  
AUTO  
RTN  
Auto Repeat  
The Auto Repeat function allows the FD-8 to repeat playback up to the AUTO RTN END point, automatically  
locate the AUTO RTN START point, then play up to the AUTO RTN END point until you cancel the function by  
pressing the STOP button. To enable this function, both AUTO PLAY mode and AUTO RTN mode should be  
turned on, and the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point should already be set.  
Using this function will facilitate the Auto Punch In/Out and Manual Punch In/Out rehearsal. See “Hint”  
after the following section.  
<Operation of the Auto Repeat mode.>  
AUTO RTN START point  
AUTO RTN END point  
PLAYBACK  
LOCATE  
PLAYBACK  
START  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locate Function  
Executing the Auto Repeat function  
1
2
3
3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN START  
point.  
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END  
points.  
The FD-8 operates as shown in the diagram, and stops at  
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”  
on page 66 for information on storing the desired points  
in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END  
key.  
the AUTO RTN START point.  
• You can set a preroll time in the [Preroll ?] menu in SETUP  
mode so that the FD-8 will start playback preroll time before  
the locate point. You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10  
seconds. Refer to the chapter “Changing the Initial Settings  
(SETUP Mode)” on page 102.  
2. Press the AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key to turn on  
the [PLAY RTN] indicator on the bottom of the  
display.  
AUTO  
PLAY  
RTN  
<Hint>  
You can make repeated Auto Punch In/Out rehearsal much easier and quicker by using the Auto Repeat function.  
Set the AUTO RTN START point prior to the AUTO PUNCH IN point, and set the AUTO RTN END point after the AUTO  
PUNCH OUT point. The recorder will repeat the operation automatically so you can concentrate on your rehearsal.  
Cancel Auto Repeat mode before you record a take.  
The FD-8 will play this range repeatedly for rehearsal, which makes it easy for you to check the recording level and practice  
your performance.  
AUTO PUNCH IN point  
AUTO PUNCH OUT point  
AUTO RTN START point  
AUTO RTN END point  
Rehearsal range  
PLAYBACK  
PLAYBACK  
START  
LOCATE  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Function  
Preview Function  
The preview function enables you to repeatedly audition the rise (fade in) or the fall (fade out) of the sound data  
at a locate point (edit point) that is stored in the AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, or CLIPBOARD  
IN/OUT key. This is also called “point rehearsal.”  
With this function, you can check the locate points in real-time. You can also use this function to fine-tune the  
position of the locate points while previewing the sound. This function is effective only when the FD-8 is stopped.  
• Previewing the fall of the sound (fade out)  
While holding down the SHIFT key, press the AUTO END  
START key, the AUTO PUNCH IN key, or the CLIPBOARD  
OUT key.  
• Previewing the rise of the sound (fade in)  
While holding down the SHIFT key, press the AUTO RTN  
START key, the AUTO PUNCH OUT key, or CLIPBOARD IN  
key.  
PREVIEW  
PREVIEW  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
START  
IN  
OUT  
END  
IN  
OUT  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
AUTO PUNCH  
AUTO RTN  
CLIPBOARD  
UNDO/  
REDO  
UNDO/  
REDO  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
HOLD/  
STORE  
EDIT  
PGM SEL  
PGM SEL  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
VARI  
PITCH  
AUTO RTN  
AUTO PLAY  
LOCATE  
LOCATE  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
SHIFT  
P.EDIT  
LOC MEM  
<Display indication during the Preview operation>  
<Display indication during the Preview operation>  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
ABS  
F
F
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Approx. 2sec.  
Approx. 2sec.  
1 sec. (normal playback)  
1 sec. (mute playback)  
1 sec. (mute playback)  
1 sec. (normal playback)  
The sound rises at the memory point.  
The sound falls at the memory point.  
The FD-8 repeats playback the “rise sound” at the locate  
point (edit point). As shown in the diagram, one-second  
of data prior to the locate point is muted during  
playback. The mute is off (fade in) at the locate point  
and the sound is played back for one second.  
The FD-8 will repeat this operation until you quit the  
Preview function.  
The FD-8 repeats playback of the “fall sound” at the locate  
point (edit point). As shown in the diagram, one-second  
of data prior to the locate point is played back, then  
muted (fade out) at the locate point. The muted playback  
continues for one second. The FD-8 will repeat this  
operation until you quit the Preview function.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Function  
Executing the Preview function  
1
3
2
2
1. Press the desired memory key while holding down  
the SHIFT key when the FD-8 is stopped.  
Pressing the desired memory key will enable you to  
preview the sound at the locate point (edit point) stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
2. To adjust the monitor sound, use the corresponding  
channel MON mix section and MON MASTER knob.  
Note: If data stored in each memory key is in the initial state,  
all memory keys will be in ABS time 00H 00M 00S.  
Inotherwords, theprogramheadvalueisinthememory. Should  
fade out preview be executed in this condition, the [Void Data !]  
message and memory data [00H 00M 00S] will alternately flash  
in the display as a warning.  
Operation  
Memory key  
AUTO PUNCH IN key  
AUTO RTN END key  
CLIPBOARD OUT key  
The FD-8 plays the fall (fade out) of  
the sound at the locate point stored in  
the keys.  
However, for fade in preview, this will function as the memory  
data [00H 00M 00S] point.  
AUTO PUNCH OUT key  
AUTO RTN START key  
CLIPBOARD IN key  
The FD-8 plays the fall (fade in) of the  
sound at the locate point stored in the  
keys.  
3. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
Trimming the sound while previewing  
You can trim the position of the locate point (edit point) using the JOG dial while you preview the sound.  
At this time, you can also adjust the size of the trimming steps (the amount of offset controlled by the JOG dial).  
Trimming allows you to fine-tune the position of the locate point stored in the memory keys while previewing the  
sound.  
Use this function to change the Auto Punch In/Out points, the start point of Copy & Paste and Move & Paste, and  
the start and end points of the Erase function.  
<Notes>  
• You can audition the result of trimming during the next preview. That is, if you trim the position while previewing the  
sound for the first time, you can check the result when you preview the sound next time.  
• If the locate point is shifted outside the range of the preview playback as a result of trimming, [Void Data!] and the  
locate point indication appear alternately. In this case, you cannot use the Preview function. Trim the position again so  
that it will be within the playback range.  
• When Auto Punch mode is turned on and you trim the Auto Punch In or Auto Punch Out point while previewing the  
sound with [Void Data!] indicated on the display, Auto Punch mode will be cancelled.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Function  
1
5
2, 4  
3
5
3
1. Start previewing the sound by following the steps  
described on the previous page.  
3. To change the unit of trimming, press the HOLD/>  
key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD button.  
These buttons will change the trimming unit as follows:  
2. Use the JOG dial to trim the position.  
When previewing starts, the unit of JOG trimming flashes  
on the screen. For example, value of SF (sub-frame) flashes  
if ABS Time Base or MTC Time Base is selected. CLK (clock)  
flashes if BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected.  
Time Base  
ABS or MTC  
BAR/BEAT/CLK  
HOLD/> key  
or  
M
S
BAR  
BAR  
H
F
F
CLK  
CLK  
SF  
The flashing value also indicates the position you can  
trim.  
F FWD button  
Example: Time Base is ABS (value of SF flashes.)  
M
S
H
SF  
REWIND button  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
Flash  
F
LOC  
H
M
S
SF  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
4. Trim the position at the selected unit (digit).  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
5. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key.  
The trimmed locate point (edit point) data will be stored  
in the corresponding memory key.  
Example: Time Base is BAR/BEAT/CLK (CLK flashes.)  
BAR  
CLK  
Flash  
LOC  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
MIDI Synchronization  
MIDI clock sync system  
You can configure the sync system to use a stand-alone sequencer synchronizing as a MIDI clock slave by inserting  
time signature settings and tempo settings at any position in a song using a programmable Tempo Map of the FD-  
8. In this system, the recorder output of the FD-8 is routed to the input channel faders, and up to four MIDI  
sound sources connected to the input jacks are routed to the MON mix section. In this way, you can mix down up  
to eight channel sound sources without using an external mixing console. You can also mix down digital signals  
to an external digital master recorder by connecting MON OUT (L/R) of the FD-8 to RECORDER IN.  
• Initialize the FD-8 before the operation.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
Connecting and setting an external device  
1. Connect the MIDI OUT jack of the FD-8 to the MIDI IN jack of the MIDI sequencer.  
2. Set the MIDI sequencer to “MIDI clock slave” mode, and connect the MIDI sound source (played automatically)  
to the input jack of the FD-8.  
3. Connect the effect units, if desired.  
Setting MIDI SYNC OUT  
1. In the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu in SETUP mode, select “MIDI clock (Clk)” for the MIDI sync  
signal output.  
If you wish to use the Metronome function, turn the “Setting the metronome function” menu in SETUP mode to ON.  
• See pages 101 and 103 for more information.  
Creating a Tempo Map  
1. Specify time signatures for the measures using the “Setting a time signature” menu in SETUP mode.  
Then, specify the tempo for given measures and beats using the “Setting a tempo” menu in SETUP mode.  
• See pages 98 and 100 for more information.  
2. Play the FD-8 in play mode to see if the MIDI sequencer synchronizes to the FD-8 according to the Tempo Map.  
At this time, select the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base to see if the MIDI sequencer synchronizes correctly.  
Overdubbing  
1. Overdub the syncing MIDI sound sources to tracks 1-8 as described in the “Quick Operation Guide.”  
You can also record a MIDI sound source as a guide.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Mixing down while syncing MIDI sound sources  
When you finish overdubbing, proceed to mixdown. As shown in the diagram, use the connected MIDI sound  
sources as virtual tracks, synchronize them to the FD-8, and mix down digital signals while applying effects.  
Effect Unit 1  
POINT!  
Effect Unit 2  
Digital Master Recorder  
7
2
8
6
1
6
MIDI  
Sequencer  
3
MIDI sound sources  
4
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
2
AUX RTN  
MONO/L  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
R
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
6. Use the input channel faders and the PAN knobs to  
adjust the playback levels and stereo image of  
tracks 1-8.  
1. Set the channel 1-8 INPUT SEL switches to [TRK].  
2. Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to  
[L/R+MON].  
Turn the MON knob in the MON mix section of the  
corresponding channels toward [INPUT] to adjust the  
input level of the MIDI sound sources, and use the MON  
PAN knob to adjust the stereo image.  
3. Raise the master faders L/R to [7-8].  
4. Connect the MON OUT (L/R) jacks and the  
RECORDER IN jacks directly.  
7. Use the MASTER knob in the monitor section to  
adjust the final output level for mixdown.  
This connection will route the L/R+MON signals output  
from MON OUT (L/R) to the DAT OUT jacks via the  
RECORDER IN jacks for mixdown. (The L/R+MON signals  
include the playback signals from tracks 1-8 and eight  
MIDI sound sources.)  
8. If you wish to apply effects to a track, turn the AUX  
knob and AUX RTN knob of the corresponding  
channel to adjust the effect amount and balance.  
5. Set the “Setting digital output tracks” in SETUP  
mode to [L- , r- ].  
• See page 110 for more information.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
MTC sync/Machine Control system  
This section explains a synchronization system controlled by a computer using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) and  
controlled by MTC (MIDI time code) output from the FD-8.  
The FD-8 adds a given offset value to the ABS time on the disk and outputs the information as MTC of a given  
frame rate. In addition, the FD-8 can receive external MMC and Fostex System Exclusive Message (FEX) to perform  
certain operations. Changing the device ID number included in the messages transmitted from the computer  
allows you to control various operations on the FD-8 individually. Use the “Setting the MIDI device number”  
menu in SETUP mode to set the device ID number.  
• Initialize the FD-8.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
Connecting an external device  
1. Connect the MIDI IN jack and MIDI out jack to the MIDI OUT/IN jacks of the computer (using a MIDI interface).  
The computer should be running sequence software that supports MMC and MTC.  
2. Set the sequence software to MTC slave mode and MMC output mode, and select the desired MTC frame rate.  
3. Connect the MIDI sound sources and effect units accordingly, in the manner as explained in the “MIDI clock  
sync system” section.  
Setting MIDI SYNC OUT  
1. Set the MIDI sync signal to be output to “MTC (Mtc)” in the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu in SETUP mode.  
At this time, select [Mtc] for Time Base for convenience.  
• Refer to page 103 for more information on SETUP mode.  
Setting MTC OFFSET  
1. Set the time offset from theABS time (less than six hours) in the “Setting an MTC offset value” menu in SETUPmode.  
• See page 104 for more information.  
Setting a frame rate  
1. Select the same MTC frame rate as that for the sequence software in the “Setting an MTC frame rate” in SETUP mode.  
• See page 104 for more information.  
Setting the device ID number  
1. Set the same device ID number as the MMC device number for the sequence software and the FEX device  
number in the “Setting the device ID number” menu in SETUP mode.  
You do not set a number if the sequence software transmits [7Fh], which means [ALL DEVICE].  
• See page 112 for more information.  
Checking synchronization and Machine Control  
1. Operate the FD-8 in play mode, and check to see if the sequence software synchronizes to the MTC output from the  
FD-8.  
Check to see if the FD-8 plays, stops, and locates points correctly when it is controlled from the computer.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Overdubbing  
1. Overdub on tracks 1 - 8 as explained in “Overdubbing” of the “MIDI clock sync system” section.  
Mixing down while syncing the MIDI sound sources  
1. Synchronize the output from tracks 1-8 with eight MIDI sound sources, and mix down while applying the effects, as  
explained in “Mixing down while syncing MIDI sound sources” in the “MIDI clock sync system” section.  
Effect Unit 1  
POINT !  
Digital Master Recorder  
Effect Unit 2  
MMC  
MTC  
Computer  
with MMC/MTC  
compatible software  
MIDI  
MIDI sound sources  
<Please read this>  
About MMC REC Out function:  
Output MMC command  
(Device No. =7F fixed)  
Operation on the FD-8  
If you use the MMC REC Out function, operating the FD-8 will  
cause the MIDI OUT connector to output the MMC command  
that corresponds to the operation.  
RECORD + PLAY buttons  
Punch in operation in TAKE mode of  
Auto Punch In/Out.  
REC command  
For example, pressing the PLAY button while pressing the  
RECORD button will output the MMC REC command from  
the MIDI OUT connector. The following commands are output:  
Punch in operation via a footswitch.  
RECORD button On/OFF.  
Input monitor ON/OFF command  
Rehearsal In in rehearsal mode of  
Auto Punch In/Out.  
These MMC commands are output only when you operate  
the buttons on the FD-8. They are not output when the FD-8  
receives external MMC commands.  
Rehearsal In via a footswitch.  
PLAY button  
You cannot turn off the MMC REC Out function. Whenever  
you perform any of the operations described above, the  
corresponding command is output. This is something you  
should note. If the sequencer connected to the FD-8’s MIDI  
OUT is in record mode and you operate the FD-8, the  
corresponding MMC command will be recorded in a track on  
the sequencer. Then, if MIDI data is sent from the sequencer  
to the FD-8, the MMC command recorded in the sequence  
data will cause the FD-8 to enter record mode.  
Punch Out in TAKE mode of  
Auto Punch In/Out.  
REC EXIT command  
STOP command  
Punch Out via a footswitch.  
STOP button  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Sync system in Slave mode  
You can set up the system in which the FD-8 in Slave mode synchronizes to an external master MIDI device.  
In this example, a master device is a computer running sequence software.  
Note: Make sure to use an external MIDI device that is able to output MTC as a master device.  
• Initialize the FD-8 before you start the operation.  
• If multiple Programs exist, select the desired Program first.  
Connecting an external device  
1. Connect the MIDI OUT jack of a computer running sequence software to the MIDI IN jack of the FD-8.  
The connected computer should be running sequence software that supports MMC/MTC.  
Setting up the external device  
1. Set the following items on the sequence software.  
• Set up the sequence software to output MTC.  
• Set a frame rate of MTC.  
• Check the start time of the song.  
* Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the external device for more information.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
with Sequence Software  
MTC  
Setting the FD-8  
1. Set the frame rate of the sequence software, as described in the “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting an MTC frame rate” on page 104 for more information.  
2. Set an offset time value in the “Setting an MTC offset value” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting an MTC offset value” on page 104 for more information.  
3. Set the desired mode in the “Setting Offset mode” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting Offset mode” on page 105 for more information.  
4. Turn Slave mode [on] in the “Setting the Slave mode” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting the Slave mode” on page 106 for more information.  
5. Set the slave type to [VAri] in the “Setting the Slave type” menu in SETUP mode.  
* See “Setting the Slave type” on page 107 for more information.  
6. Press the TIME BASE SEL key to display the MTC Time Base.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
<Notes on setting MTC-related parameters>  
The MTC offset time and MTC offset mode determines whether or not MTC (MTC offset time) is output at ABS 0 or 001BAR 1  
00CLK. Follow the guide below, according to the start time of the song of the sequence software.  
• Offset mode = ABS:  
Set the MTC offset time to three seconds prior to the start time of the song of the sequence software. The FD-8 does not chase  
and lock to incoming MTC immediately. To synchronize the FD-8 from the beginning of the song, you need to set a preroll time  
and play the song a little before the top of the song of the sequence software.  
• Offset mode = BAR :  
You can set the MTC offset time to the start time of the song.  
As explained previously, the ABS 0 position is [-002BAR 1 00CLK], which allows for synchronization from the top of the song.  
The duration of two measures changes depending on the setting of the time signature and the tempo of the first measure.  
(Example: slow tempo = longer duration)  
Checking the chase and lock operation  
1. When you play the sequence software, the [MTC] indicator on the display lights up, and the flashing [SLAVE]  
lights up continuously, which indicates that chase and lock is complete.  
At this time, make sure that MTC output from the sequence software is being displayed on the FD-8.  
2. When you stop the sequence software, MTC transmission is interrupted and the FD-8 stops.  
The [SLAVE] indicator on the display starts flashing.  
3. While the sequence software is fast forwarding or rewinding, the FD-8 remains stopped. As soon as you start  
play back or record, the FD-8 immediately performs the chase and lock operation.  
• If the FD-8 does not chase and lock correctly, check the connecting cables and settings.  
Note: The FD-8 can chase and lock to MTC only when the speed variation of MTC sent from the master device (computer)  
is within +/-5.6%. Within this range, the FD-8 will use the Vari Pitch function internally to chase MTC. If this range is  
exceeded, the FD-8 cannot chase and lock. If the speed variation of the master device is large, play the sequencer before  
recording so that the FD-8 will learn the speed of the master device. In this way, the FD-8 will lock to time code quicker next  
time.  
Recording  
You can record data on the FD-8 while the FD-8 is chasing and locking to the sequence software signals.  
<Hint>  
About the option “Vari” in the “Setting the Slave type” in SETUP mode:  
If the FD-8 chases and locks to only an incoming MTC, Vari Pitch is applied all the time. Under this condition, if the FD-8  
outputs digital signals to a connected digital device, the device may not be able to accommodate the FD-8’s speed variation  
(MTC speed variation of the master device), resulting in interrupted signal input at the digital device.  
To solve this problem, set the “Setting the Slave type” menu to “Free.” This will cause the FD-8 to follow its internal clock after  
it finishes the chase and lock operation, supplying stable digital signals to the external digital device.  
With the “Free” setting, if the MTC offset between the master and slave devices exceeds “10 frames,” the slave device  
interprets this as out of lock, and tries to chase and lock again (re-chase operation). During the re-chase operation, the audio  
output will be muted and digital signal transmission is also interrupted. If the offset is within 10 frames, the slave device will  
continue running while recognizing the offset.  
Note: If you set the “Setting the Slave type” menu to “Vari,” the FD-8 applies Vari Pitch all the time to chase MTC.  
However, if a digital input track is assigned in the “Setting digital input tracks” in SETUP mode, the FD-8 will sync to incoming  
digital signals (external word clock sync). This means that the FD-8 will not apply Vari Pitch during chasing even with the  
“Vari” setting. The FD-8 will sync to incoming digital signals after it locks MTC.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
Sync system with “adat” by the slave mode  
This section will explain the sync system using “adat” equipment.  
* Initialize FD-8.  
* Confirm the program.  
* Set adat and FD-8 to the same sampling frequency.  
Equipment connections  
Make connections, respectively, adat DIGITAL OUT to FD-8 DATA IN, and adat MIDI OUT to FD-8 MIDI IN.  
Note:In order to slave operate adat equipment and the FD-8, the best setting is to supply “adat” digital signals together with MTC  
from the master unit.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
DATA IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
MIDI IN  
Slave (FD-8)  
MIDI OUT  
adat  
Master  
Setup of adat (master)  
1. Setup for output of MTC.  
2. Setup the MTC frame rate to be output.  
3. Check the MTC time to be output.  
4. If necessary, set to allow output of “adat” digital signals.  
This is unnecessary for the adat.  
* Refer to the adat Owner’s Manual for details.  
Setting on the FD-8 (slave)  
1. Set the same frame rate as the adat for the “MTC frame rate setting” in the Setup mode.  
* Refer to “MTC frame rate setting” in Setup mode on page 104 for the operation and more information.  
2. Select a desired mode for “MTC offset mode setting” in the Setup mode. (*)  
* Refer to “MTC Offset mode setting” in Setup mode on page 105 for the operation and more information.  
3. “MTC offset time setting” in Setup mode allows you to set the MTC time to start the Chase lock operation. (*)  
* Refer to “MTC Offset time setting” in Setup mode on page 104 for the operation and more information.  
4. Set Slave mode [on] for “Slave mode setting” in Setup mode, and select [AdAt] as a slave mode type for  
“Slave mode type setting” in Setup mode.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Synchronization  
* Refer to “Slave mode setting” in Setup mode on page 106 and “Slave mode type setting” in Setup mode on page 107, for the  
operation and more information.  
5. Press the TIME BASE SEL key to select the MTC indication for the Time Base.  
<Note on setting the MTC offset time>  
“MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting” determine at which point (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1 /00CLK) the MTC  
(MTC offset time) is output. Refer to the following, depending on the song start time set in your sequence software, to set the  
MTC output from the FD-8.  
* Offset mode: ABS  
When the master drive (adat) outputs the specified MTC (MTC offset time), the slave FD-8 will start the Chase-Lock operation.  
Remember that it will take a little time for the FD-8 to start chase-lock after the MTC is input.  
Setting the MTC offset time will allow the Chase-Lock operation to start from the specified point of the master device.  
For example, when the master device (adat) outputs MTC as 00H 00M 00S 00SF ~ 00H 40M 00S 00SF, if the FD-8 offset  
(ABS mode) is 00H 20M 00S 00SF, the FD-8 ABS time will lock from 23H 40M 00S 00SF, and if the frame rate setting is 30  
frame, lock will disengage temporarily at 23H 29M 59S 29SF. Later on, it will lock again at ABS time in the vicinity of 00H 00M  
03S. This is an indication that the ABS time 24H is set as access maximum time in the FD-8 and that return to “0” is not  
continuous. Should no overshooting of 24H occur in the ABS time, overshooting of 24H with a random MTC OFFSET can be  
carried out correctly.  
* Offset mode: BAR  
As described previously, the FD-8 uses “-002BAR/1 /00CLK” as an “ABS 0” point, there is enough time until the Chase Lock  
starts, and Chase Lock will be complete by the specified MTC offset time. The time length of the two bars before the Chase  
Lock will vary depending on the setting in the first bar for the “Time signature setting” and the “Tempo setting.” Setting the MTC  
offset time will also allow the Chase Lock operation to start from the specified point of the master device.  
Note: After this setting, check the following items on the FD-8:  
* [SLAVE] is flashing on the display: When the Chase Lock operation is complete, this indicator will light.  
* [DIGITAL] lights up on the display: The units is syncing to the external digital signal.  
Note: Do not connect or remove the optical cable from the DATA IN connector while Slave mode is on. Otherwise, the unit  
may generate noise, affecting the connected external devices.  
Checking Chase Lock  
1. When the master device (adat) is played, the [MTC] in the display on the slave device (FD-8) will light, the  
[SLAVE] will light in the display, and Chase Lock will be complete.  
Check to make sure the display shows the correct MTC time.  
2. When you stop the master device, the MTC transmission from the master device will be interrupted and the  
slave machine will also stop.  
The illuminated [SLAVE] will flash.  
3. While the master device is in fast forward or rewind mode, the slave machine will remain stopped.  
When you start playing the master device, the slave machine will start the Chase Lock operation.  
Note: The FD-8’s re-chase window is “10 frames’ fixed. That is, when the MTC of the master device and the MTC of the  
slave machine slip from each other by 10 frames or more, the slave machine will interpret this as being out of sync, and it will  
try to lock with the master device again (this is called a “re-chase” operation). During the re-chase operation, audio output will  
be muted. If slippage is within 10 frames, the slave machine will continue running while accepting the slippage. Since the  
master device supplies a digital signal to the slave machine in this system, the slave machine will not perform the re-chase  
operation after chase lock is complete.  
* If the Chase Lock operation or control is not correct, check all connections, cables, and settings.  
Recording  
You may perform recording while the adat and the FD-8 are chase-lock.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Outline of the save/load operation  
The FD-8 has a Save/Load function for song data, which enables you to save the recorded song data (including  
SETUP data) to a connected backup media, such as a DAT machine or adat. You can also load the saved data from  
a DAT or adat to the current drive disk in the FD-8. You can save and load one Program at a time to and from a  
DAT, adat, or SCSI drive.  
The following diagram shows different methods (depending on the current drive type) for saving data to con-  
nected media, and how to load data to the FD-8. Select the appropriate connections depending on the type of  
connected media.  
Using a SCSI drive as the current drive:  
Backup Drive  
Current Drive  
Note: You can save and load data between two SCSI drives,  
SCSI  
SCSI drive-2  
SCSI drive-1  
FD-8  
regardless of the recording mode used for the disks.  
Current Drive  
Note: You can save and load data to and from a DAT or adat  
only if the current drive is a SCSI fixed disk and it has been  
formatted in Mastering mode. You cannot perform the save/load  
operation if the disk has been formatted in Normal mode.  
SCSI drive  
DATA IN  
DATA OUT  
DAT  
adat  
The connection should follow one of these cases:  
Note: Be sure to set the ID number for a backup SCSI drive to  
“6.”  
* Transferring data between SCSI drive-1 and SCSI drive-2  
* Transferring data between SCSI drive-1 and a DAT (See “Note.”)  
* Transferring data between SCSI drive-1 and an adat (See “Note.”)  
Using an optional 2.5-inch internal hard disk as the current drive:  
Backup Drive  
Note: You can save and load data to and from a DAT or adat only  
SCSI  
SCSI drive  
when the current drive has been formatted in Mastering mode. You  
cannot perform the save/load operation if the disk has been formatted  
in Normal mode. However, you can save and load data to and from a  
SCSI drive, regardless of the recording mode used for the disk.  
FD-8  
Current Drive  
2.5-inch internal hard disk  
DATA IN  
DAT  
adat  
DATA OUT  
Note: If you are using an optional 2.5-inch internal hard disk as the  
current drive, you can connect only a SCSI backup disk to the SCSI  
terminal on the FD-8 (the ID number should be set to “6.”). If you con-  
nect a SCSI drive disk set up as a current drive disk (the ID is set to any  
number other than “6”) and you turn on the power to the drive, the FD-8  
will recognize this SCSI drive as the current drive.  
The connection should follow one of these cases:  
* Transferring data between a 2.5-inch internal hard disk and a SCSI drive  
* Transferring data between a 2.5-inch internal hard disk and a DAT (See “Note.”)  
* Transferring data between a 2.5-inch internal hard disk and an adat (See “Note.”)  
<Notes on connection>  
If the connected DAT (preferably a professional model) features sync operation with external clock and its “INPUT (or EXTERNAL  
SYNC)” sync mode switch is set to OPTICAL, trying to load data with both digital I/Os connected as shown in the diagram may  
cause a digital clock loop to form and loading may fail.  
In this case, set the sync mode of the DAT to INTERNAL, or disconnect the optical cable from the DATA OUT of the FD-8 before  
loading data. This type of problem will not occur during the save operation since the DATA IN connector of the FD-8 is not  
effective.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
<Notes on DAT machines and the save and load operations>  
You may use a DAT machine that can record digital data in S/P DIF format without compression in 16bit/44.1kHz mode.  
You cannot use media that uses a compression recording technique, such as an MD or DCC, media that automatically adjust the  
space between songs, such as a CD-R, media that converts sampling rate, or via Adat optical connectors. You can use media  
that features SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) if it satisfies the requirements described above.  
The following DAT models have been confirmed to operate with the FD-8. Basically, any DAT machine that has digital in/out  
connectors in S/P DIF format will work for the save and load operation. However, some models (except those listed below) may  
cause errors.  
Fostex: D-5, Pioneer: D-05  
The save and load operations using a SCSI drive, DAT, or adat are described below:  
* Using a DAT (S/P DIF digital signal) (Saving/loading individual Program data: only in Mastering mode)  
Following about five seconds of pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), song data in the current drive is  
output to a connected DAT. Two tracks of audio data (shown in black in the diagram) are output. To save data from  
Real tracks 1–8, two-track data will be output four times, which takes twice as much time as the song duration (ABS  
0 to REC END). To save all data including Additional tracks 9–24, two-track data will be output twelve times, which  
takes twelve times the song duration. Saved data is also loaded two tracks at a time.  
DAT tape  
Trk 23&24  
Trk 3&4  
Trk 21&22  
Trk 1&2  
Current drive disk  
Program 2 (P02)  
Program 1 (P01)  
Program 99 (P99)  
* Using an adat (adat digital signal) (Saving/loading individual Program data: only in Mastering mode)  
After about five seconds of pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), song data in the current drive is output  
to a connected adat. Eight-track audio data (shown in black in the diagram) is output. To save the data from Real  
tracks 1–8, data will be output once, which takes the same amount of time as the song duration (ABS 0 to REC END).  
To save all data including Additional tracks 9–24, eight-track data will be output three times, which takes three times  
the song duration. Saved data is also loaded eight tracks at a time.  
Trk 17 & 18  
& 19 & 20  
& 21 & 22  
& 23 & 24  
Trk 9 & 10  
& 11 & 12  
& 13 & 14  
& 15 & 16  
Trk 1 & 2 &  
3 & 4 & 5 &  
6 & 7 & 8  
adat tape  
Current drive disk  
Program 2 (P02)  
Program 1 (P01)  
Program 99 (P99)  
* Using a SCSI disk (Saving/loading individual Program data: in any mode)  
All Real track data and Additional track data is output simultaneously to a SCSI disk as shown in black in the  
diagram. Therefore, saving and loading a Program takes much less time relative to a DAT or adat. No pilot signal or  
beep is recorded. If the available disk space is smaller than the song data size, you may use multiple disks (up to 99  
disks) to save and load an entire song.  
Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7  
& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13  
& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &  
19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24  
SCSI disk  
Current drive disk  
Program 2 (P02)  
Program 1 (P01)  
Program 99 (P99)  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
* The following items can be saved and loaded as song data:  
Memory data (CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT points)  
Time base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK)  
SETUP mode: * Time signature setting (BAR BEAT), * Tempo setting, * Click On/Off setting, * Preroll time setting,  
* MIDI sync out setting, * MTC frame rate setting, * MTC offset time setting, * MTC offset mode setting,  
* Rec protect On/Off setting, * Slave mode On/Off setting, * Slave type setting  
* The following items cannot be saved and loaded as song data:  
Auto Play mode and Auto Return mode On/Off setting  
Vari-pitch mode On/Off setting, and Pitch data  
SETUP mode: * Digital In setting, * Digital Out setting, * Bar/Beat Resolution On/Off setting, * Device ID setting  
Saving and loading data using a SCSI drive as the current drive  
If the current drive is a SCSI drive (removable disk or fixed disk), you can save and load data to and from a  
backup SCSI drive, DAT, or adat. If the backup drive is a SCSI drive, the save and load operations are not limited  
by the type of recording mode used for the current drive. If you are using a DAT or adat as a backup drive and  
using a fixed disk as the current drive, the fixed current drive should be formatted in Mastering mode to enable  
saving and loading.  
Saving/loading data using another SCSI drive  
This section explains how to save and load data to and from a removable current SCSI drive and a backup SCSI  
drive. Turn off the power to all connected devices before you make connections.  
Note: Unlike the save/load operation using a DAT or adat, you cannot abort the save/load operation that uses a SCSI drive. Nor  
can you monitor audio data during the operation. Also, you cannot load data to a disk formatted in a recording mode that differs  
from that on the backup disk. For example, you cannot load data from a backup disk in Normal mode to a disk in Mastering mode.  
Load  
Save  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
Current drive  
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
SCSI  
R
L
Backup drive  
(ID number = “6”)  
SCSI drive connection and preparation  
* Connect your backup SCSI drive to the SCSI connec-  
tor on the current SCSI drive. Be sure to attach a ter-  
minator on the second SCSI drive to terminate the  
SCSI chain.  
<Title of data to be saved to a backup SCSI disk>  
Data recorded in the current drive has a name, such as  
Program 1 or Program 2. (These titles appear abbreviated,  
such as [P01], [P02]).  
On the other hand, a backup disk manages data using dif-  
ferent titles, such as Backup 1 or Backup 2. (These appear  
abbreviated, such as [B01] or [B02] on the display.)  
For example, Program 1 (P01) on the current drive disk is  
saved as Backup 1 (B01) for the backup disk.  
* Be sure to set the ID number for the backup SCSI  
drive to “6.”  
* Prepare the disk recorded as the current drive and  
a backup disk (unformatted disk).  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving data  
* You can back up data using the “Save PGM ?” menu  
in SETUP mode. The following procedure assumes that  
a recorded disk has been inserted in the current SCSI  
drive, Program 1 (P01) has been selected, and an  
unformatted disk will be used as the backup disk.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
MB  
REMAIN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<[Save PGM ?] menu>  
* Output signal options: [AdAt], [dAT], [SCSi id-6]  
When the formatting operation is completed,  
[COMPLETED !] lights up, [SCSi id-6] flashes, then the FD-  
8 displays the following.  
* Program options:  
* Track options:  
P01 - P99 (an individual Program)  
When using an adat or DAT: tracks 1–8,  
tracks 1–16, Tracks 1–24;  
This example shows that the data to be saved is Program  
1 on the current drive. If the current drive has multiple  
Programs, use the JOG dial to select the desired Program.  
When using a SCSI disk: All tracks will be  
automatically selected.  
44.1kHz  
1. Insert an unformatted disk into the backup drive.  
ABS  
2. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode, then  
use the JOG dial to select [Save PGM ?] menu.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
7. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Program and  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Save Device ?] appears and the selected output signal  
option flashes. ([dAT] flashes.)  
The save operation starts and the following indication  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
appears.  
This example shows that Program 1 data is being saved  
as Backup data 1. As the save operation progresses, the  
REMAIN value (e.g.: -58MB) counts down.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
MB  
REMAIN  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
When the save operation is completed, [COMPLETED!]  
lights up and the following indication appears.  
4. Turn the JOG dial to select a flashing [SCSi id-6] to  
select the connected SCSI drive as a save  
destination.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
COMPLETED !  
Lights up  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
Flashing  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
8. Press the EXIT/NO key to exit SETUP mode.  
The FD-8 displays ABS 0 of the Program on the current  
drive.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 recognizes that a disk in the backup drive is  
unformatted, and displays [Unformat ?], then proceeds  
to the [Bk Format?] menu (backup disk format) in SETUP  
mode, then displays the following.  
Note: The backup data will use the number of the saved  
Program. (e.g., if you save P01 [#0001 data, the backup data  
will be named as B01[#0001.) You cannot edit the title of the  
backup data.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SURE  
?
Flashing  
The above procedure assumes that the saved data size is  
smaller than the available space of the backup disk. You can  
use only one backup disk. To save data larger than a single  
backup disk, refer to the next <Memo> for information on  
saving data using multiple backup disks.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
6. Press and hold down the RECORD button, and  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays the following and starts formatting the  
disk. The unformatted disk area size will count down as  
the format operation progresses.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
<Memo>  
If Program data to be saved is larger than the space available on one backup disk, the FD-8 tells you how many  
backup disks you need when you select a Program in Step 6 of the previous procedure.  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
(e.g.)  
ABS  
(e.g.)  
ABS  
Three backup disks are  
required.  
Two backup disks are  
required.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
When you set the first disk, the save operation starts. When the disk is full, the FD-8 automatically ejects the disk  
and displays [Ins. Disk 2] (meaning “Please set the second disk.”).  
Set the second disk to continue the save operation.  
Note: Mark the disks so that you can identify the order of the disks and you will be able to insert the disks in  
the correct order to perform the load operation.  
Loading data  
* You can load data using the “Load PGM ?” menu in  
SETUP mode. The following procedure assumes that  
the backup disk has been inserted into the backup  
SCSI drive, and a formatted disk has been inserted  
into the current drive.  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select a flashing [SCSi id-6] to  
load data from the connected SCSI disk.  
DIGITAL  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<[Load PGM ?] menu>  
* Input signal options: [AdAt], [dAT], [SCSi id-6]  
* Program options:  
* Track options:  
P01 - P99 (an individual Program)  
When using an adat or DAT: tracks 1–8,  
tracks 1–16, Tracks 1–24;  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The saved backup number (B01) flashes. This means that  
B01 on the backup disk is selected to load.  
When using a SCSI disk: All tracks will be  
automatically selected.  
If only this backup file exists on the disk, turning the JOG  
dial will allow you to select [B01] or [Eject].  
Select [Eject] if you wish to change the disk.  
If there are multiple backup files on the disk, using the  
JOG dial allows you to select the desired backup data  
(B01, B02, B03, etc.) or [Eject].  
1. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode, then  
use the JOG dial to select [Load PGM ?] menu.  
2. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
44.1kHz  
[Load Device ?] appears, [DIGITAL] lights up, and the se  
lected input signal option flashes. ([dAT] flashes.)  
Flashing  
ABS  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
The FD-8 indicates that the load destination disk (cur-  
rent drive disk) does not have any data, then indicates a  
flashing [SURE?].  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
DIGITAL  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Lights up  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
MB  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SURE  
?
Flashing  
SCSI  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
At this time, using the JOG dial allows you to select the  
load destination Program.  
When the load operation is completed, [COMPLETED !]  
lights up.  
Since there is only one Program in the destination disk in  
this example, you can select only [P01]. If the destination  
disk contains multiple Programs, see the following  
<Memo>.  
44.1kHz  
COMPLETED !  
DRIVE  
Lights up  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
7. Use the JOG dial to select the load destination Pro  
gram and press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 starts loading data.  
8. Press the EXIT/NO key to exit SETUP mode.  
The Time Base display of the loaded Program appears.  
Backup data [B01] is loaded to Program [P01] on the cur  
rent disk. As the operation progresses, the REMAIN value  
counts down.  
9. Press the EJECT button on the backup drive to eject  
the backup disk.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
MB  
REMAIN  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Memo>  
<Memo>  
If you saved one Program to multiple backup disks, the  
FD-8 indicates that the disk in the drive is the “first” disk,  
as follows:  
If the load destination disk contains multiple Programs,  
the FD-8 asks whether you wish to set up a new Program  
in Step 6 of the procedure above. ([03] and [SURE ?] flash.)  
This is because the existing Programs may already con-  
tain data. If you do not mind overwriting the existing  
data with the loaded data, select the desired Program  
number as the load destination.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
Confirm that this message appears, and execute the load  
operation. When data in the first disk is loaded, the FD-8  
automatically ejects the disk and displays [Inst. Disk 2],  
meaning “Please insert the second disk.” Insert the sec-  
ond disk and continue the load operation.  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
In the above display example, the FD-8 asks you if you wish  
to create a new Program 3, since Programs 1 and 2 on the  
current drive disk contain data.  
Note: Make sure that you insert the disks in the correct  
order. If you insert the wrong disk, the FD-8 displays [Wrong  
disk] and ejects the disk. Follow the disk markings you made  
during the save operation.  
Saving/loading via a DAT or adat  
To use a DAT or adat to save and load data, the current SCSI drive disk should be a fixed disk that is formatted in  
Master mode. Refer to the “Saving/loading data using an 2.5-inch internal hard disk as the current drive” section  
for a detailed procedure of the save/load operation.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving/loading data using an 2.5-inch internal hard disk as the current drive  
If you are using an optional 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk as the current drive, you can save and load data to  
and from a DAT, adat, or backup SCSI drive disk.  
<Note on the save/load operation using an optional 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk>  
When you are using an optional 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk for the save and load operation, make sure that [IDE] lights  
up in the current drive section of the display. If a SCSI drive is connected to the FD-8 as the current drive, disconnect the  
SCSI drive. Alternatively, turn off the power to the SCSI drive before you turn on the power to the FD-8.  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
M
S
F
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
IDE  
[IDE] lights up  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Saving song data via a DAT or adat  
This section explains how to save data from an optional 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk (current drive) to a DAT  
or adat. You can simultaneously save two tracks of data from an individual Program to a DAT, or eight tracks to  
an adat. Be sure to turn off the power to the all devices before you make connections.  
Note: The current drive disk should be formatted in Mastering mode to enable you to save data to a DAT or adat.  
Save  
DAT or adat  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
OPTICAL IN  
(or adat in)  
FD-8 with a 2.5-inch internal hard disk  
DAT (or adat) connection and preparation  
* Set the DAT or adat so that it will accept S/P DIF  
digital input (or adat digital input). Some models may  
have to be set so that they will synchronize with the  
incoming digital signal. Refer to the manual that came  
with your DAT or adat for more information.  
* Connect DATA OUT from the FD-8 to the OPTICAL  
IN on a DAT, or to adat in on an adat using an optical  
cable. If you are using S/P DIF digital signal (DAT),  
use an optional Fostex COP-1 (optical–coaxial con-  
verter) to connect a DAT that is equipped with only a  
COAXIAL (RCA) digital input.  
* After all connections have been made, turn on the  
power to all devices, and insert a tape into a DAT (or  
adat). Make sure that the tape’s “write-protect tab” is  
closed so that it can be recorded, and that the tape is  
rewound to the beginning.  
Note: Depending on whether you use a DAT or an adat,  
you need to switch between S/P DIF digital signal (OPTI-  
CAL) and adat digital signal for the DATA IN/OUT jacks.  
These signals are completely different, although they use  
the same jack configuration.  
* Set the sampling frequency of a DAT (or adat) to the  
same value as the FD-8 (44.1kHz).  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Saving data  
* You can back up data using the “Save PGM ?” menu  
in SETUP mode.  
The following procedure assumes that Program 1 on  
the 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk (current drive)  
contains performance data.  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays the total time of the selected Program.  
You can edit this total time value. That is, you can shorten  
the time required for the save operation.  
For example, if the duration of the Program is 8 minutes  
25 seconds, you can edit this time value to 5 minutes.  
(You can edit up to 59 minutes 59 seconds.)  
<[Save PGM ?] menu>  
* Output signal options: [AdAt], [dAT], [SCSi id-6]  
* Program options: P01 - P99 (an individual Program)  
This is useful when the backup tape lacks adequate space.  
* Track options:  
When using an adat or DAT: tracks 1–8,  
tracks 1–16, Tracks 1–24;  
Flashing  
M
S
PGM  
SCSI  
When using a SCSI disk (SCSi id-6): All tracks  
will be automatically selected.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
1. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode.  
To edit the time value, use the HOLD/> key, REWIND  
button, or F FWD button to move the flashing cursor to  
the desired digit, and turn the JOG dial to change the  
value. (The above example shows you can edit the minute  
value.)  
2. Use the JOG dial to select [Save PGM ?] menu, then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[Save Device ?] appears and the selected output signal  
option flashes ([dAT], [AdAt], or [SCSi id-6].)  
7. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
The FD-8 displays the track selection screen.  
First, Real tracks 1–8 appear. Turn the JOG dial to change  
number “8” to the desired number.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
8. Use the JOG dial to select the desired tracks.  
Options are Tr 1–8, Tr 1–16 (Real track 1–8 and  
Additional track 9–16), or Tr 1–24 (Real track 1–8 and  
Additional track 9–24).  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired digital signal  
for the save operation ([dAT] or [AdAt]).  
Select this to save data in the adat digital signal  
format to a connected adat.  
[AdAt]  
9. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Select this to save data in the S/P DIF digital signal  
format to a connected DAT.  
[dAT]  
The display changes as follows.  
This means “Start recording on the DAT (or adat)!”  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The number of the Program selected before the FD-8  
entered SETUP mode flashes on the display, indicating  
that you can select a Program to save.  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
10. Start recording on the DAT (or adat).  
At this time you could set a START-ID or a locate point at  
the recording start point so that you will be able to find  
the top of the Program to load later.  
Flashing  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
11. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
5. Use the JOG dial to select a Program to save.  
If multiple Programs exists in the current drive disk, turn  
the JOG dial to change the Program number.  
The FD-8 starts saving data and displays the total time  
required for the save operation. The time value starts  
counting down a few seconds later.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Before the value starts counting down, the FD-8 is  
transmitting a pilot signal that will be a reference of the  
tape position during the load operation.  
A DAT records two tracks at a time. An adat records  
eight tracks at a time.  
Level meters 1 and 2 indicate the level of signal output to  
a DAT. Level meters 1–8 indicate the level of signal  
output to an adat. When the save operation is completed,  
[COMPLETED !] lights up and the FD-8 stops.  
Stop recording on the DAT (or adat).  
Actual data recording starts when the count down starts.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
REMAIN  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
12. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button.  
The FD-8 exits SETUP mode and [COMPLETED !]  
disappears. The FD-8 displays the Time Base (ABS 00m  
00s 00f) of the saved Program.  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
This area shows which tracks are  
currently being saved. During the  
save operation to the DAT, it indi-  
cates tracks 1–2, then changes to  
3–4, 5–6, etc. in two-track steps.  
During the save operation to adat,  
it indicates tracks 1–8, then 9–16,  
and 17–24, according to the track  
selection in Step 8.  
This value represents the to-  
tal duration of the Program  
being saved, and counts  
down as the save operation  
progresses.  
<Tips>  
You can monitor the signal being saved through the MON mix sec-  
tion, or through the headphones connected to the DAT (or adat).  
Follow the steps below to monitor the signal via the MON mix sec-  
tion.  
* Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to “MON.”  
* Turn the MON knobs for channels 1 and 2 for DAT backup (or  
channels 1–8 for adat backup) toward “TRK.”  
* Turn up the MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
Loading song data via a DAT or adat  
This section explains how to load backup data from a DAT or adat to a 2.5-inch IDE internal hard disk (current  
drive). You can load two-tracks of individual Program data from the DAT simultaneously, or eight tracks of data  
from the adat.  
This procedure assumes that no recordings exist on the current drive (load destination). Be sure to turn off the  
power to all devices before you make connections.  
Note: The current drive disk should be formatted in Mastering mode to load data to from a DAT or adat.  
Load  
DAT or adat  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
OPTICAL OUT  
(or adat out)  
FD-8 with a 2.5-inch internal hard disk.  
DAT (or adat) connection and preparation  
* Connect the DATA IN on the FD-8 to the OPTICAL  
OUT on a DAT or to “adat out” on an adat using an  
optical cable. If you are using S/P DIF digital signal  
(DAT), use an optional Fostex COP-1 (optical–coaxial  
converter) to connect a DAT that is equipped only  
with a COAXIAL (RCA) digital output.  
Note: Depending on whether you use a DAT or an adat,  
you need to switch between S/P DIF digital signal (OPTI-  
CAL) and adat digital signal for the DATAIN/OUT jacks. These  
signals are completely different, although they use the same  
jack configuration.  
* After all connections are made, turn on the power  
to all devices, and insert a backup tape into a DAT (or  
adat). Rewind the tape to a point slightly before the  
beginning of the saved data.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
Loading data  
* You can load data using the “Load PGM ?” menu in  
SETUP mode. The following procedure assumes that  
the current drive disk (2.5-inch internal hard disk)  
does not contain any recordings, and that Program 1  
(P01) has been set up on the disk.  
6. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays the track selection screen.  
You can change the value of a flashing number.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
<[Load PGM ?] menu>  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
* Input signal options: [AdAt], [dAT], [SCSi id-6]  
* Program options: P01 - P99 (an individual Program)  
7. Use the JOG dial to select the desired tracks.  
Options are Tr 1–8, Tr 1–16 (Real track 1–8 and  
Additional track 9–16), or Tr 1–24 (Real track 1–8 and  
Additional track 9–24). In this example, select Tr 1–8.  
* Track options:  
When using an adat or DAT: tracks 1–8,  
tracks 1–16, Tracks 1–24;  
When using a SCSI disk (SCSi id-6): All tracks  
will be automatically selected.  
8. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 enters “load standby” mode and displays the  
following.  
1. Press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode.  
2. Use the JOG dial to select [Load PGM ?] menu,  
[DIGITAL] lights up and [SURE ?] flashes.  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
DIGITAL  
[Load Device ?] appears and the selected input signal  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Lights up  
option flashes. ([dAT], [AdAt], or [SCSi id-6] flashes.)  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SURE?  
CLK  
Flashing  
Flashing  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Flashing [DIGITAL] indicates that signal is not input from  
the digital device (DAT or adat) correctly. Check the con-  
nections.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
9. Make sure that [DIGITAL] lights up steadily, and  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The FD-8 displays the following, indicating “Start  
playing the DAT!” If you are using an adat, [Play AdAt]  
flashes.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired type of  
digital signal used for the load operation ([dAT] or  
[AdAt]).  
DIGITAL  
44.1kHz  
Flashing  
SETUP  
Select this to load data in the adat digital signal  
format from a connected adat.  
[AdAt]  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Select this to save data in the S/P DIF digital signal  
format from a connected DAT.  
[dAT]  
10. Start playing the DAT (or adat).  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The number of the Program set up on the current drive  
flashes on the display.  
Start playing the tape from a point slightly prior to the  
top of the Program data.  
The FD-8 reads the recorded pilot signal, then  
automatically starts loading data. (Wait a while until the  
following indication appears.)  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Flashing  
PGM  
DIGITAL  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
REMAIN  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
5. Use the JOG dial to select a Program into which to  
load data.  
If only one Program has been set up, turning the JOG dial  
enables you to select [01] or [02]. If you select [02], “PGM”  
of [Load PGM] and [New] flash alternately.  
This means that a new Program (P02) should be set up  
before you execute the load operation. (If multiple  
Programs exist in the current drive disk, turn the JOG  
dial to select a Program from these Programs plus one  
new Program.)  
The FD-8 displays the track numbers being loaded and  
the total time of the Program. The time value starts  
counting down as the load operation progresses.  
The RECORD RACK LEDs for tracks 1 and 2 flash, and  
level meters 1 and 2 indicate the level of signal input  
from the DAT. (All RECORD RACK LEDs flash and level  
meters 1–8 indicate the level of signal input from an adat.)  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
When the load operation is completed, [COMPLETED !]  
lights up. The FD-8 displays the top of the Program in the  
current drive and stops.  
<Tips>  
You can monitor the signal being loaded. Follow the steps below.  
* Set the SELECTOR in the monitor section to “MON.”  
* Turn the MON knobs for channels 1 and 2 for DAT backup (or  
channels 1–8 for adat backup) toward “TRK.”  
11. Stop playing the DAT (or adat).  
12. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button.  
* Turn up the MASTER knob in the monitor section.  
[COMPLETED !] disappears.  
Saving and loading song data via a SCSI drive  
This section explains how to save and load data to and from a SCSI backup drive and a 2.5-inch internal hard  
disk. Recording mode on the current drive does not affect this operation. Refer to the “Saving and loading song  
data between two SCSI drives” for more information on the procedure.  
Connect a SCSI backup drive (ID #=6) to the SCSI connector on the 2.5-inch hard disk in the FD-8, as shown below.  
<Note on connections>  
Be sure to connect a SCSI backup drive to the SCSI connector. Make sure that the ID number for the SCSI backup  
drive is set to “6.”  
Load  
Save  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
AUX RTN  
2
AUX RTN  
1
R
MON OUT  
L
R
ST OUT  
L
2
AUX SEND  
1
R
MONO/L  
R
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
POWER  
SCSI  
R
L
FD-8 with a 2.5-inch internal hard disk  
SCSI backup drive  
(ID# = 6)  
Note: As shown in the drawing, when the SCSI drive assigned for the current drive is daisy chained to the SCSI drive for  
backup and also connected to the optional 2.5 inch IDE internal hard disk which is in the current drive mode, please note the  
following items.  
INPUT  
8
INPUT  
7
MONO/L  
8
INSERT  
7
Current SCSI drive  
Backup SCSI drive  
RECORDER IN  
MIDI  
IN  
MIDI  
OUT  
DATA  
IN  
DATA  
OUT  
PUNCH  
IN/OUT  
SCSI  
R
L
FD-8 with a 2.5 inch internal hard disk  
When the 2.5 inch hard disk is assigned as the current drive:  
Switch on power to FD-8 only and not to the two SCSI drives connected.  
If save/load of song data is to be executed using the SCSI drive assigned for backup, switch on power to the FD-8 and the  
SCSI drive assigned for backup. Do not switch on power to the SCSI drive assigned for the current drive. By utilizing either  
method, FD-8 will always recognaize the 2.5 inch IDE hard disk as the current drive.  
In order to use the SCSI drive as the current drive, power to any equipment that is interconnected must, of course, be  
switched on. The SCSI drive will automatically switch to the current drive mode.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Loading Song Data  
<Quick Troubleshooting>  
If you are stuck in one of the following situations, refer to the explanations below for corrective actions.  
The FD-8 recognizes that the backup disk cannot be used  
in its current condition. There are two reasons for this.  
# The FD-8 displays the following during the save  
operation using a SCSI backup drive:  
Flashing  
* You inserted a disk that was used for the current drive.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
* The disk’s recording mode differs from that of the data  
to save or load.  
For example, the disk used to save or load data in Mas-  
tering mode is inserted to save data in Normal mode.  
That is, you tried to use a disk (that was once used to  
save or load data in a particular recording mode) to save  
data in a different recording mode.  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The backup disk contains some data and does not have  
enough free space to record new data. The FD-8 is ask-  
ing you whether or not the existing data should be de-  
leted. Take one of the following actions:  
Backup drive  
Current drive  
save  
load  
data recorded in Normal  
mode  
dsik in Normal mode  
* If you wish to delete the existing data:  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key twice. Pressing the key once  
causes [Del. ALL ?] and [SURE ?] to flash, and pressing it  
again deletes the existing data so that you will be able  
to continue the save operation.  
Current drive  
Backup drive  
save  
* If you do not wish to delete the existing data:  
Turn the JOG dial to display [Eject], then press the EX-  
ECUTE/YES key. The disk will be ejected. Insert another  
backup disk in the drive.  
diskusedtosave/loaddata  
in Normal mode  
disk in Mastering mode  
To be able to use the ejected disk, you need to re-format  
it as described below.  
# When you inserted a SCSI backup disk into the  
backup drive to save data, the following messages  
appeared in turn and the disk was ejected.  
* Quit SETUP mode and return to the Time Base display  
of the current disk, then insert the disk in the backup  
drive.  
* Select the [Bk Format ?] menu in SETUP mode and re-  
format the backup disk.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)  
SETUP mode of the FD-8 offers the “Changing the initial settings” menus that configure the operating environment  
of the FD-8, a “Check” menu that enables you to check the number of events of each track, and the “Execution”  
menus that execute certain operations, such as save and load.  
The “Changing the initial settings” menus include 15 parameters as shown in Table-1 below. These parameters  
were set before the unit was shipped from the factory (These values are called the “initial settings.”). Modifying  
these settings allows you to change the operating environment of the FD-8.  
The “Check” menu provides one parameter “Checking the number of events” as shown in Table-2.  
Also, as shown in Table-3, the “Execution” menus include six items: Title Edit?, Del. PGM?, Load PGM?, Save PGM?,  
Format?, and [Bk Format?], which you can execute by selecting the corresponding SETUP menu. This chapter  
explains how to use the “Changing the initial settings” menus shown in Table-1 and the “Check” menu shown in  
Table-2. For more information on the “Execution” menus, refer to the corresponding pages in the “Reference  
page” column in Table-3.  
<Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menu  
<Table-2> “Check” menu  
Parameters  
Default setting  
001BAR 4/4  
Refer page  
98  
Check item  
Refer page  
112  
Setting a time signature  
Check of the Event number on the track.  
Setting a Tempo  
001BAR 1 120  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
Setting the metronome function  
Setting a preroll time  
oFF  
00  
<Table-3> “Execution” menu  
Setting MIDI sync output signal  
Setting an MTC frame rate  
Setting an MTC offset value  
Setting Offset mode  
CLk (Clock)  
25 frame  
Execution item  
Refer page  
00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF  
Deleting a Program  
35  
36  
85  
85  
28  
31  
ABS  
Editing a Program title  
Setting the slave mode  
oFF  
Saving song data to an external digital device (DAT, adat, SCSI)  
Loading song data from an external digital device  
Formatting an current drive disk  
Setting the slave type  
VAri  
Setting the record protect function  
Setting digital input tracks  
Setting digital output tracks  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
Setting the MIDI device ID number  
oFF  
L- r- (No assign)  
Formatting an backup drive disk  
L- r- (ST. OUT L, R)  
oFF  
00  
111  
112  
Selecting SETUP mode  
Follow the steps below to select the desired SETUP menu in SETUP mode.  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key on  
This lights up when the FD-8  
enters SETUP mode.  
The title of the SETUP menu  
appears. You can select a different  
menu via the JOG dial.  
the control panel.  
Pressing the SETUP key causes the FD-8 to enter SETUP  
mode. The FD-8 displays the first hierarchy level of the  
SETUP menu you selected before you turned off the power.  
At this time, the menu graphics appear as shown below.  
The flashing menu indicator is the currently-selected  
menu. Turning the JOG dial will select a different menu  
and the corresponding menu indicator will flash.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
2. Select the desired menu using the JOG dial, then  
press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
This indicates the position of the SETUP menu. Selecting a  
menu via the JOG dial will move the flashing cursor.  
The FD-8 displays the second hierarchy level of the  
selected SETUP menu, where you can set parameters.  
(Refer to the next page for more information.)  
To exit SETUP mode, press the STOP button or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-8  
returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and  
finally exits SETUP mode.  
Note: With the factory initial settings, or when you turn on the  
power again after you format an external SCSI disk, “Sign. Set?  
(Setting a time signature)” appears. Otherwise, the first hierarchy  
level of the previously-selected SETUP menu appears.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
The following diagram shows the position of each menu.  
“Tempo Set ?” menu  
“Del PGM ?” menu  
“Preroll ?” menu  
“Sync Out ?” menu  
“Sign. Set ?” menu  
“Title Edit ?” menu  
“Click ?” menu  
“Frame Rate ?” menu  
“Mtc Offset ?” menu  
“Ofset Mode ?” menu  
“Slave Mode?” menu  
“SlaveType?” menu  
“Bk Format ?” menu  
“Format ?” menu  
“Rec Protect ?” menu  
“Digi. in ?” menu  
“Digi. out ?” menu  
“Save PGM ?” menu  
“Load PGM ?” menu  
“ Resolu ?” menu  
“NOs Event ?” menu  
“Device ID ?” menu  
Setting a time signature (“Sign. Set ?” menu)  
Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal  
programmable Tempo Map. For example, you can specify “4/4 for the first and second measures, and 2/4 from  
the third measure.” Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map, which allows the FD-8 to  
manage a song using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metronome function.  
The time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer are output to an  
external sequencer.  
• Initial setting: [4 4] for bar [001] (not specified for 002 and later.)  
• Setting range of measures: [001] - [999]  
• Setting range of time signatures: [1 4], [2 4], [3 4], [4 4], [5 4], [1 8], [3 8], [5 8], [6 8], [7 8], [8 8], [- -] (delete)  
• Max. setting points: 64 points  
* You can set time signatures for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Storing a time signature  
1. Select a Program for which to set a time signature.  
Refer to “Using the Program Change function” on page  
34 for information on selecting a Program.  
At this time, rotating the JOG dial clockwise enables you  
to check the current time signatures in sequence.  
With the initial setting, time signatures after the first  
measure are all [---BAR- -]. This means that a time  
signature of 4/4 applies to all measures.  
2. Press the SETUP key, use the JOG dial to select the  
[Sign.Set ?] menu, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The indication changes to [Sign. Chk] and the current  
time signature appears. The initial setting is [001BAR 4  
4] (4/4 for the first measure).  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The indication changes to [Sign. Edit] and [001 (measure)]  
of [001BAR 4 4] flashes.  
You can enter any time signature here.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
BAR  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
BAR  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
•
Rotate the JOG dial to enter the desired measure number.  
If you wish to keep the initial setting for the first measure,  
enter 002. If you try to enter any number other than  
001, the time signature indicator shows [- -]. This means  
that no time signature is set for any measures other than  
the first measure. To change the time signature for the  
first measure, follow the steps below, without entering  
any other measure number.  
1 4, 2 4, 3 4, 4 4, 5 4, 1 8, 3 8, 5 8,  
6 8, 7 8, 8 8, - -  
[- -] means no time signature assigned,  
and is used to delete time signature data.  
(Refer to “Modifying (or deleting) stored  
time signatures” for more information.)  
Time signatures  
Note: You cannot assign “- -” to measure 001.  
•
Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the F FWD  
button to display flashing [—] of [- -] and enter the time  
signature using the JOG dial.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key whenever you enter  
a pair of measure/time signature values.  
Repeat this step to specify the necessary time signature  
for the measures.  
The following measure numbers and time signatures can  
be entered via the JOG dial.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUP mode  
after storing data, press the STOP button or the EXIT/  
NO key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-  
8 returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu,  
and finally exits SETUP mode.  
001-999, selection of [All Clear?]  
indication.  
[All Clear?] means that data in its entirety  
will be cleared. This is used to initialize  
the parameter. (Refer to “Clearing stored  
time signature/tempo data.”)  
Measures  
Modifying (or deleting) stored time signatures  
1. Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a time  
Caution: If modifying or deleting the stored time signature  
signature” section to display [Sign. Edit].  
causes the bar/beat setting for the tempo specified in the  
“Setting a tempo” menu to disappear, the tempo setting will  
also be automatically erased.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button so that the flashing cursor is on the  
time signature value.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUP mode  
after storing data, press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO  
key. Each time you press one of these keys, the FD-8  
returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and  
finally exits SETUP mode.  
3. Use the JOG dial to enter a new value.  
Entering [—] deletes the existing data.  
Note that you cannot enter [—] for measure 001.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Clearing all time signature and tempo settings  
To cancel the All Clear operation, press the STOP button  
Caution: Using this function will erase not only the time  
signature setting but also the tempo data specified in the  
“Setting a tempo” menu described in the next section.  
or the EXIT/NO key now. Each time you press one of  
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.  
1. Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a time  
signature” section to display [Sign. Edit].  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The stored time signature and tempo data in its entirety  
are cleared, and the initial settings are restored.  
2. While the measure number is flashing, turn the JOG  
dial counter-clockwise to select [All Clear ?].  
When [All Clear ?] appears, [SURE ?] flashes, and you can  
clear the time signature and tempo data in the next step.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SURE  
?
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting a tempo (“Tempo Set ?” menu)  
The “Setting a tempo” menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time  
signature setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure.  
Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map, which is used by the FD-8 to manage the song using the  
BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base, and enable the Metronome function. Tempo settings as well as time signature settings  
are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer.  
• Initial setting: bar 001, beat 1: 120 (001BAR 1 120TEMPO)  
• Setting range of measures: Determined by the time signature setting.  
• Setting range of beats: Determined by the time signature setting.  
• Setting range of tempo: 30-250/quarter note, --- (delete)  
• Max. setting points: 64 points  
* You can set the tempo for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Checking the stored tempo setting  
1. Select a Program to check the tempo setting for.  
Press the SETUP key, use the JOG dial to select the [Tempo  
Set ?] menu, then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
2. Rotate the JOG dial clockwise.  
You can view the current tempo values in sequence.  
Tempo value [- - - BAR - TEMPO - - -] means that no  
tempo values are specified after the current setting.  
With the initial setting, [001 BAR 1 TEMPO 120] is  
followed by [- - - BAR - TEMPO - - -].  
Indication on the display changes as shown below, and  
the current tempo appears. The initial setting is [001  
BAR 1 TEMPO 120]. This means that a tempo for the first  
beat of the first measure is set to 120.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
BAR  
TEMPO  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Storing a tempo value  
3. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Pressing the HOLD/> key or the F FWD button repeatedly  
will move the flashing cursor from TEMPO to BAR and to  
, then returns to TEMPO.  
The display indicates [Tempo Edit] and [TEMPO] flashes.  
(See the figure below.)  
This means that you can enter a value now.  
Pressing the REWIND button repeatedly will move the  
cursor in the opposite direction.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
The bar and beat settings for the time signatures  
determine the setting range of bar and beat settings for  
the tempo. You can specify a tempo between 30 and 250  
per quarter note.  
BAR  
TEMPO  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The indication [---] means “no tempo,” which is used to  
delete a tempo setting.  
4. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor to the desired  
edit location, and use the JOG dial to enter the bar/  
beat/tempo information to be stored.  
When you turn the JOG dial, [---] appears for the bars  
and beats for which no tempo has been set.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the stored bar/beat/tempo, then  
returns to the Tempo Edit indication (as shown in step  
4).  
4
4
Tempo=90  
Tempo=120  
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to store necessary tempo data.  
For example, if you specify tempo values in the song with  
[001 BAR 4 4] and [005 BAR 3 4] settings, the Tempo  
Map includes the settings shown in the table below.  
3
4
Tempo=120  
Tempo Map  
Tempo=60  
Time signature setting  
Tempo setting  
001 BAR 1 TEMPO 120  
003 BAR 1 TEMPO 90  
001 BAR 4  
005 BAR 3  
4
4
005 BAR 3 TEMPO 60  
007 BAR 2 TEMPO 120  
Modifying (or deleting) stored tempo settings  
1. Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a tempo  
value” section to display [Tempo Edit ?].  
4. Use the JOG dial to enter a new value.  
Entering [---] deletes the data at the selected bar/beat.  
2. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button so that the flashing cursor is on the  
measure number. Turn the JOG dial to select bar/  
beat to edit or delete.  
5. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
6. Press the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key  
repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button so that the flashing cursor is on the  
TEMPO number.  
Setting the Metronome function (“Click ?” menu)  
“Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to determine whether or not the FD-8 outputs a metronome  
sound from Real track 8 during playback or recording. Turning the Metronome function on enables you to  
record your performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound.  
Note: Since Real track 8 outputs the metronome sound when this function is turned on, you cannot play the audio recorded on this track.  
Also, do not record any data on track 8.  
The FD-8 can output the metronome sound even from an unrecorded area (outside of the range from ABS 0 to REC END) on track 8.  
• Initial setting: [oFF]  
• Option: [oFF], or [on]  
* You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting the Metronome function  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
enter SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Click ?] ([?] flashes.),  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
The current setting ([oFF] or [on]) appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key lights up the flashing [?]  
character steadily; the current setting flashes. The initial  
setting is [oFF] as shown below.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select [on] or [oFF].  
Selecting [on] will enable the output of the metronome  
sound. Selecting [oFF] (initial setting) will disable the  
metronome output.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore a setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the  
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press  
one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode  
and displays the previous Time Base.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the selection (on or oFF), then returns  
to the indication in step 2.  
Setting a preroll value (“Preroll ?” menu)  
The FD-8 features the Preroll function that enables you to locate a position a few seconds prior to a specified  
locate point. The “Setting a preroll value” menu allows you to set the preroll time (in seconds).  
The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to monitor the audio data from a point slightly before the  
locate point.  
• Initial setting: [00] second  
• Setting range of preroll time: [00]-[10] seconds in one second steps  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Preroll time (before the locate point) can be set between 00 and 10 seconds.  
This point is located if the current position is before  
the locate point.  
This point is located if the current position is after the locate point.  
Locate point (stored in the memory key)  
This point is actually located.  
Setting a preroll time  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Turn the JOG dial to enter a desired preroll time  
value.  
You can set a value in one-second increments.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise increases the value, and  
rotating it counter-clockwise decreases the value.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Preroll ?] ([?] flashes.),  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current preroll time setting appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key lights up the flashing [?]  
character steadily; the current setting flashes. The initial  
setting is [00] as shown below.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The display shows the value, then returns to the  
indication that appeared in step 2.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the  
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press  
one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode  
and displays the previous Time Base.  
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting MIDI sync output signal (“Sync Out ?” menu)  
The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the  
MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the FD-8 to an external MIDI device.  
The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC (MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option  
depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device.  
If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as described  
previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the MTC offset  
mode as described later.  
• Initial setting: [cLK] (clock & Song Position Pointer)  
• Option: [cLK] (clock & Song Position Pointer), [Mtc] (MIDI time code), [oFF] (no output)  
* You can set the parameters for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting MIDI sync signal  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
Each option appears on the display as follows.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
When [cLK] is selected:  
2. Rotate the JOG dial to select [Sync Out ?] ([?]  
flashes.), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The currently-selected MIDI sync signal type appears on  
the display.  
SYNC OUT  
When [Mtc] is selected:  
MTC  
SYNC OUT  
When [oFF] is selected:  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
indication. The MIDI sync signal type indication flashes,  
and the indicator flashes indicating the SYNC OUT setting.  
The initial setting is [cLk] as shown below.  
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore a setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the  
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press  
one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode  
and displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Turn the JOG dial to select the desired MIDI sync  
signal.  
Setting this parameter to [cLK] (initial setting) will select  
MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer.  
Setting the parameter to [Mtc] will select MIDI time code.  
With the [oFF] setting, no MIDI sync signal will be output.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected MIDI sync signal type is stored, and the FD-  
8 returns to the display with the flashing [?] indicator as  
shown in step 2.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting an MTC frame rate (“Frame Rate ?” menu)  
The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT  
connector of the FD-8 to an external MIDI device. If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal to  
[MTC], you need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device (or  
sequence software).  
• Initial setting: [25 F] (25 frames)  
• Setting range of frame rate: [24 F], [25 F], [30 DF], [30 F]  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting an MTC frame rate  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
3. Turn the JOG dial to enter the desired frame rate.  
enter SETUP mode.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter-clockwise  
displays available frame rates as an alternative.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Frame Rate (?)] ([e] and  
[?] flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/YES  
key.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected frame rate is stored and the display returns  
The current frame rate setting appears on the display.  
to the indication with a flashing [?] that appeared in step  
Press the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
2.  
character; the current setting flashes. The initial setting  
of [25 F] flashes as shown below.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained  
44.1kHz  
prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP  
SETUP  
button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of  
F
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
F
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Setting an MTC offset value (“Mtc Offset ?” menu)  
The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to specify an offset time value - the difference between the  
time of MTC output from the FD-8 and the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf time. You need to specify this value if you have  
selected [Mtc] for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu.  
With the initial setting of 00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF, for example, MTC of 59M 57S 00F 00SF is output at the ABS time  
00M 00S 00F 00SF. You can also set an offset value from the 001 BAR 1 00 CLK value (bar/beat) on the Tempo  
Map. Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode.  
• Initial setting: [00H: 59M: 57S: 00F: 00SF]  
• Setting range of offset time: 00H: 00M: 00S: 00F: 00SF - 23H: 59M: 59S: 29F: 99SF  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting an MTC offset  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Use the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to move the flashing cursor, and turn  
the JOG dial to enter the desired offset value.  
Press the HOLD/> key or the F FWD button to move the  
flashing cursor to the right, and press the REWIND button  
to move it to the left. Turning the JOG dial continuously  
will round up the number to the next digit.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Mtc Offset (?)] ([t] and  
[?] flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/YES  
key.  
The current offset value appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the value in seconds flashes.  
You can enter a value at the flashing digit. The number  
[57] of the initial setting [57S] flashes as shown below.  
For example, if you rotate the JOG dial on the seconds  
digit up 59, turning the dial further will increase the  
number on the digit of minute by one.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected offset value is stored and the display returns  
to the indication with the flashing [?] that appeared in  
step 2.  
44.1kHz  
MTC OFFSET  
SETUP  
F
H
M
S
SF  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained  
prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP  
button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of  
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
MTC OFFSET  
SETUP  
F
H
M
S
SF  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Note: For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to [ABS] (see the  
next section) and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 01H 00M  
00S 00F, you may wish to set a preroll of three seconds with an  
MTC offset of 00H 59M 57S 00F.  
Setting Offset mode (“Ofset Mode ?” menu)  
If you have selected [MTC] in the “Setting Offset mode” menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode.  
This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F or at 001 BAR  
1
00 CLK (bar/beat) of the Tempo Map.  
Note: As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to [ABS] and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 1H 00M 00S 00F, you may want to set  
a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00H 59M 57S 00F.  
If you select [BAR ] as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two measures is automatically set. Use 01H 00M 00S 00F; do not set a preroll value.  
Note: If you set Offset mode to [BAR ] and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer, the tempo of the sequencer may  
sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the FD-8 and the tempo of the software are slightly different even if both use the same  
tempo. Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the FD-8 correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo of the FD-8 on  
the sequence software. No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes the FD-8 via MIDI clock, instead of MTC.  
• Initial setting: [ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F]  
• Offset mode option: [ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F], or [BAR 001 BAR 1  
]
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting MTC Offset mode  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Offset mode.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter-clockwise will  
alternately show a flashing [ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F] and  
[001BAR 1 ].  
If you select [ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F], the specified MTC  
offset time is output at ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F.  
If you select [001BAR 1 ], the specified MTC offset time  
is output at 001 BAR 1 00 CLK of the Tempo Map.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Offset Mode (?)] ([e]  
and [?] flash alternately.), then press the EXECUTE/  
YES key.  
The current offset mode appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key to turn off the flashing [?]  
character. The Offset mode indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F] flashes as  
shown below.  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SETUP  
F
BAR  
ABS  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
ABS  
H
M
S
F
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
The selected offset mode is stored and the display returns  
to the indication with flashing [e] and [?].  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained  
prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP  
button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of  
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
F
ABS  
H
M
S
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Setting the Slave mode (“Slave Mode ?” menu)  
The “Setting the Slave mode” menu allows you to set Slave mode of the FD-8 to on and off.  
When Slave mode is turned on, the FD-8 will lock to MTC input from the master device. The FD-8 can also sync  
to the selected external sync signal if you select an appropriate Slave type.  
With this menu setting, you can set up a system in which multiple FD-8s operate in sync or an FD-8 synchronizes  
to a Fostex digital multitrack recorder, as well as the FD-8 locking to MTC output from the sequence software.  
• Initial setting: [o FF]  
• Option: [on] or [o FF]  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
* The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation.  
Turning Slave mode on and off  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
enter SETUP mode.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Slave Mode (?)] ([e] and  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
[?] flash alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES  
key.  
The current slave mode appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the Slave mode indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [o FF] flashes as shown below.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
After you set Slave mode to [on], you need to select the  
Slave type (type of sync signal) described in the next section.  
3. Use the JOG dial to turn Slave mode on and off.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
alternates flashing [on] and [oFF].  
44.1kHz  
SLAVE  
SETUP  
Selecting [on] turns Slave mode on, and selecting [oFF]  
turns Slave mode off.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
If you select [oFF], [e] and [?] flash alternately.  
If you select [on], [e] and [?] flash alternately and [SLAVE]  
flashes as shown below.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained  
prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP  
button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of  
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
This means that the FD-8 has not locked to the sync signal.  
When the FD-8 locks to the sync signal from the master  
device, [SLAVE] lights up steadily.  
Setting the Slave type (“Slave Type ?” menu)  
The “Setting the Slave type” menu enables you to select the type of external sync signal used when the FD-8 is set  
as a slave to sync to an external device.  
• Initial setting: [VAri]  
• Option: [VA ri], [SP di F], [Ad At], [Fr EE]  
[VA ri]: The FD-8 synchronizes only to external MTC.  
[SP di F]: The FD-8 locks to MTC, then synchronizes to incoming S/ PDIF digital signals.  
[Ad At]: The FD-8 locks to MTC, then synchronizes to incoming adat digital signals.  
[Fr EE]: The FD-8 locks to MTC, then synchronizes to the internal clock.  
* You can set the parameter for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
* The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation.  
Setting the Slave type (external sync signal)  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
will cause the [VA ri], [SP di F], [Ad At], and [Fr EE]  
indicators to flash in sequence.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Slave Type (?)] ([e] and [?]  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
flash alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current Slave type appears on the display.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the Slave type indicator flashes.  
With the initial setting, [VA ri] flashes as shown below.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
<Notes>  
• You need to input MTC from an external device to the FD-8 with  
any Slave type (external sync signal).  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
• The FD-8 re-chase window is fixed to ten frames. That is, if an  
offset between the master device and slave device exceeds ten  
frames, the FD-8 interprets that as out of sync, and tries to chase  
and lock to MTC sent from the master device. (This operation is  
called “re-chasing.”) During the re-chase operation, audio output is  
muted. If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master device  
by less than ten frames, the slave machine continues running while  
recognizing the slippage.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to select the desired Slave type.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
<Notes>  
<Notes>  
• This menu is used to select a digital signal used for external  
synchronization when Slave mode is turned on. If you wish to specify  
the type of digital signals to record, you need to use the “Setting  
digital input tracks” menu.  
• If you set the Slave type to [SP di F] (S/P DIF digital signal) or [Ad  
At] (adat digital signal), [DIGITAL] lights up on the display when the  
FD-8 receives a normal digital signal from the external device. If  
the signal is abnormal, the [DIGITAL] indicators flash to give you an  
alarm.  
• When you set the Slave type, the Vari Pitch function is  
automatically disabled. (The [VARI PITCH] indicator turns off.)  
• If you set the Slave type to [SP diF] (S/P DIF digital signal),  
approximately two seconds of the sound in the entire system will be  
muted when the FD-8 locks or unlocks to clock. Make sure to input  
a stable digital signal source.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected Slave type is stored, and [e] and [?] flash  
alternately.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting obtained  
prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the STOP  
button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press one of  
these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous hierarchy  
level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode and  
displays the previous Time Base.  
Setting the Record Protect function (“Rec Protect ?” menu)  
The FD-8 features the Record Protect function, which is similar to the function of record-protect tabs on cassette  
tapes. The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you to turn the Record Protect function on and off.  
When this function is turned on, you cannot record, paste, or erase data. Use this function to protect your  
precious data from being erased accidentally.  
• Initial setting: [o FF]  
• Option: [on] or [o FF]  
* You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.  
Recording enabled/disabled  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Use the JOG dial to enable or disable recording.  
Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter-clockwise  
will flash [on] and [o FF] alternately.  
Selecting [o FF] enables recording; you can record, paste,  
and erase data.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Rec Protct (?)] ([t] and  
[?] flash alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES  
Selecting [on] disables recording; and you cannot record,  
paste, or erase data.  
key.  
The current setting appears on the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the recording enabled/disabled indicator  
flashes.  
Note: When recording is disabled (on) and you try to record,  
paste, or erase data, the FD-8 displays [Protected] for a second,  
indicating that you cannot perform the operation. To perform  
the operation, you need to enable recording (oFF).  
With the initial setting, [o FF] flashes as shown below.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
[t] and [?] flash alternately.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press  
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the  
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits  
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting digital input tracks (“Digi. In ?” menu)  
The “Setting digital input tracks [Digi.in ?]” menu allows you to assign digital signals input at the DATA IN  
connector of the FD-8 to the tracks. You can perform digital recording from an external digital device (CD, MD,  
DAT, adat, digital mixer, etc.) using this function.  
You can assign any two tracks, and route L/R output from an external digital device to these tracks. If you are  
using an external digital device with an adat output, selecting “AdAt” on the “Setting digital input tracks” menu  
enables you to record all eight track data digitally.  
• Initial setting: [L-], [r-] (No assign for L and R)  
• Assignable tracks: L channel = [1]~ [8], [—] (no assign), or [AdAt] (track 1 ~8)  
R channel = [1] ~ [8], or [—] (no assign)  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting digital input tracks  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected track assignment is stored, and [?] flashes.  
When the FD-8 receives a correct digital signal, [DIGITAL]  
lights up on the display.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Digi. in ?] ([?] flash  
alternately), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current digital input track assignment appears on  
the display. Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the  
flashing [?] character, and the L channel setting of the  
digital input track flashes.  
With the initial setting, [L-] and [r-] appear and [L-] flashes  
as shown below. You can select a flashing channel to  
assign a track.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press  
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
Note: If [DIGITAL] flashes on the display, check the  
connection with the external device, and the settings on  
the FD-8 and the external device.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Note: While a track is assigned for digital input, you cannot  
use the same track for analog recording via the  
corresponding input jack. When you finish digital recording,  
set the “Setting digital input tracks” menu to [L-, r-] (no  
assign).  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
However, in other tracks not assigned for digital input, it is  
possible to record analog signals. For example, if tracks 1  
and 2 (L-1, r-2) are selected for digital inputs, then digital  
signals in tracks 1 and 2, and analog signals in other tracks  
can be recorded, thus making it possible to simultaneously  
record digital and analog signals on all four tracks (If an  
MO disc is used for the current drive, only two tracks can  
be recorded simultaneously.).  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to select a channel (L or r) and use  
the JOG dial to specify a track.  
To select tracks 1–8, no assign (–), or AdAt, turn the JOG  
dial while [L] (Channel L) is flashing.  
To select tracks 1–8 or no assign (–), move the cursor to  
flashing [r] (Channel R) turn the JOG dial.  
When the "Setup of the digital input track" is set to "AdAt,"  
please note that tracks 1 ~ 8 will all be assigned to digital  
input and thus, analog signals cannot be recorded in any  
of the tracks.  
Note: You cannot assign L channel and R channel to the  
same track. If you assign the same track and press the  
EXECUTE/YES key, the last channel you set will have  
priority, and the first channel will be automatically set to [-].  
For example, if you assign L channel to [2], then assign R  
channel to [2], and press the EXECUTE/YES key, Lchannel  
will be set to [L-], and R channel will be set to [r-2].  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting digital output tracks (“Digi. Out ?” menu)  
The “Setting digital output tracks” menu enables you to assign the track that outputs digital signals from the  
DATA OUT connector of the FD-8 to an external digital device. You can send the recorded audio data on the FD-  
8 to an external digital device (MD, DAT, adat, digital mixer, etc.) in digital form. Any two tracks selected from  
tracks [1]–[8], or [s-t] (STEREO OUT L, R outputs) are assignable. You can also select [AdAt] to output all track  
data (1–8) simultaneously to a digital device with an adat input.  
• Initial setting: [L- ], [r- ] (Stereo Out L, R output) = s  
• Assignable tracks: L channel = [1] ~ [8], [ ] (Stereo Out L), or [AdAt]  
R channel = [1] ~ [8], or [ ] (Stereo Out R)  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
<IMPORTANT>  
Match the sampling rate of the digital input on the external device with  
the sampling rate of the FD-8 to send digital signals from the FD-8 to  
the external device.  
Setting digital output tracks  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
Note: At setup of the digital output track, tracks to be assigned to  
enter SETUP mode.  
L and R cannot be the same, for example, such as L-4 and r-4.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Digi. out ?] ([?] flashes),  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
Should setup be executed by mistakenly selecting same track  
numbers for L and R, the number setup for the L channel will be  
given priority and “ “ will be setup automatically for R.  
In other words, L channel will be setup to the specified track and R  
channel will be setup to R of STEREO OUT.  
The current digital output track assignment appears on  
the display.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the L channel setting of the digital output  
track flashes. With the initial setting, [L- ] and [r- ]  
appear, and [L- ] flashes as shown below.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected track assignment is stored, and [?] flashes.  
You can select a flashing channel to assign a track.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press the  
STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you press  
one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Press the HOLD/> key, the REWIND button, or the  
F FWD button to select a channel (L or r) and use  
the JOG dial to specify a track.  
To select tracks 1–8, Stereo Out L ( appears), or AdAt,  
turn the JOG dial while [L] (Channel L) is flashing.  
To select tracks 1–8 or Stereo Out R ( appears), turn  
the JOG dial while [r] (Channel R) is flashing.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode (“Resolu ?” menu)  
The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off.  
The initial setting is “off.” When you turn this mode on, the CLK (clock) digits will be always round off to 00 and  
be stored in the memory key while the FD-8 is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. That is, beat resolution is  
used. Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-resolution value of the CLIPBOARD IN/OUT  
points and other points in real-time. (Press the STORE key, then the corresponding memory key while playing the  
FD-8.) Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform the Copy & Past or Move & Paste operation in beat-  
resolution.  
For example, assume that you have stored the value for 001BAR1 46 CLK as the CLIPBOARD IN point, and the  
value for 002BAR 4 51 CLK as the CLIPBOARD OUT point.  
These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT resolution mode is turned off. However, the mode is turned on, the  
following values will be stored instead. The following example has a time signature setting of 4/4.  
001BAR1 46 CLK -> 001BAR1 00 CLK (A CLK value of 46 will be rounded off.)  
002BAR4 51 CLK -> 003BAR1 00 CLK (A CLK value of 51 will be rounded up.)  
• Initial setting: [o FF]  
• Options: [on] or [o FF]  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The selected mode setting is stored, and [?] flashes.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [ Resolu ?] ([?]  
flashes), then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The current BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting appears  
on the display.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press  
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the flashing [?]  
character, and the BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting  
flashes. With the initial setting, [o FF] flashes as shown  
below.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
3. Use the JOG dial to turn the mode [on] or [off].  
When you turn the JOG dial clockwise and counter-  
clockwise, [on] and [o FF] flash alternately.  
Selecting [on] turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode on, and  
selecting [o FF] turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode off.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Setting the MIDI device number (“Device ID ?” menu)  
The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you to set the FD-8 device ID number required to control the  
unit from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) or FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message).  
The transmit device ID links to this setting. You can set the device ID from 00 to 99.  
However, if the device ID number of the message the FD-8 receives is [7F], the FD-8 will recognizes it to perform  
the corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID setting.  
• Initial setting: [00]  
• Device ID: [00] ~ [99]  
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the unit.  
Setting the MIDI device ID  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Use the JOG dial to set the desired MIDI device ID  
number.  
Turning the JOG dial clockwise increments the value, and  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [Device ID?] ([?] flashes),  
then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
turning it counter-clockwise decrements the value.  
The current MIDI device ID number appears on the  
display. Pressing the EXECUTE/YES key turns off the  
flashing [?] character, and the MIDI device ID number  
flashes. With the initial setting, [00] flashes as shown  
below.  
4. Press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The MIDI device ID number is stored, and [?] flashes.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press  
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
DRIVE  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Checking the number of track events (“NOs Event ?” menu)  
The “Checking the number of track events” menu enables you to check the number of events on each track.  
Each track (including Additional tracks) of FD-8 Programs consists of consecutive audio files (and “zero” files).  
The number of events represents the total number of audio files and 0 files. Each track can contain up to 512  
events.  
If you are editing a song of typical length (about six minutes), repeated editing operation does not usually cause  
this maximum number to be exceeded. (Exceeding this limit is called “event number overflow.”) Even a 20-  
minute song will not cause event number overflow. This is because the FD-8 system always optimizes the data  
structure by keeping the number of events low. However, if a recording on a track is scattered in different areas  
of the disk, or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits, you should be  
wary of “event number overflow.” To avoid this problem, use the “Checking the number of track events” menu  
to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the initial setting (SETUP mode)  
Checking the number of track events  
1. While the FD-8 is stopped, press the SETUP key to  
enter SETUP mode.  
3. Use the JOG dial to select another (01-24) to check  
the number of events on the corresponding track.  
2. Turn the JOG dial to select [NOs Event?] ([?]  
flashes), and then press the EXECUTE/YES key.  
The screen changes as follows, indicating the number of  
events on track 1. (In this example, track 1 includes eight  
events.)  
4. Press the EXIT/NO key or the STOP button  
repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.  
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting  
obtained prior to the EXECUTE/YES key press, press  
the STOP button or the EXIT/NO key. Each time you  
press one of these keys, the FD-8 returns to the previous  
hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP  
mode and displays the previous Time Base.  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
DRIVE  
* For more information on audio files and events, refer to  
the “Audio file and event” section of the ”Before Starting”  
chapter.  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
44.1kHz  
SETUP  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SCSI  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
Indicating the track number.  
Indicating the number of  
selected track events  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List  
(Digital Multitracker)  
Date:  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Transmitted  
Version: V1.00  
Model FD-8  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Function.....................  
Default  
X
X
X
X
Basic  
Channel  
Changed  
X
X
X
X
X
Default  
Message  
Altered  
Mode  
*******************************  
X
X
Note  
X
True voice  
Number:  
*******************************  
X
X
Note ON  
X
X
Velocity  
Note OFF  
X
X
After  
X
X
Key’s  
Channel’s  
Touch  
Pitch Bend  
X
X
X
X
Control  
Change  
X
X
Program  
Change:  
X
True #  
*******************************  
(rem. 1)  
System Exclusive  
(rem. 2)  
: Quarter frame  
X
X
X
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune  
Common  
X
X
X
X
: Clock  
System  
: Commands  
Real Time  
(rem. 3)  
: Local ON/OFF  
: All Notes OFF  
: Active Sense  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Aux.  
Message  
X
X
: Reset  
rem. 1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply, FOSTEX Exclusive  
rem. 2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry, FOSTEX Exclusive  
Notes  
rem. 3: START, STOP, CONTINUE  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
: Yes  
X: No  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List  
MMC Command List  
Command List  
Movement (Recorder)  
01: STOP  
STOP  
02: PLAY  
PLAY  
03: DEFERRED PLAY  
04: FAST FORWARD  
05: REWIND  
DEFERRED PLAY  
F FWD  
REWIND  
06: RECORD STROBE  
07: RECORD EXIT  
09: PAUSE  
REC  
PUNCH OUT  
STOP  
40: WRITE  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
LOCATE to Setting Data  
CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
41: MASKED WRITE  
42: READ  
44: LOCATE  
47: SHUTTLE  
4C: MOVE  
4D: ADD  
4E: SUBTRACT  
MMC Response/Information Field List  
01: SELECTED TIME CODE  
03: REQUESTED OFFSET  
04: ACTUAL OFFSET  
08: GP 0  
Command  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ  
09: GP 1  
0A: GP 2  
0B: GP 3  
0C: GP 4  
0D: GP 5  
0E: GP 6  
0F: GP 7  
48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY  
4C: RECORD MODE  
4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS  
4F: TRACK RECORD READY  
51: RECORD MONITOR  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE  
READ/WRITE  
Inquiry Message List  
IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7  
IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 0F, 00, 01, 00, 7F, 7F, F7  
51: Fostex ID  
01, 00: Device family code  
0F, 00: Device family number FD-8  
01, 00, 7F, 7F: Software version  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance/Specifications  
Maintenance  
Cleaning the exterior  
* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth  
For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off. Then polish with a dry  
cloth.  
Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior.  
Specifications  
* Mixer section  
<Equalizer>  
<INPUT 1 ~ 6>  
HI  
: 12kHz +/-15dB (Shelving type)  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 6)  
MID  
LO  
: 200Hz ~ 5kHz +/- 15dB (Parametric type)  
: 80Hz +/- 15dB (Shelving type)  
Input Impedance  
: 20k or higher  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
<Frequency Response> : 20Hz ~ 20kHz (typical)  
<INPUT 7, 8>  
Connector  
<Dynamic Range>  
: 105dB (typical)  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
: XLR-3-31 type (x 2)  
: 20k or higher  
* Recorder section  
Input Impedance  
Reference Input Level : L: -50dBV, M: -30dBV,  
H: -10dBV  
<Recording/Reproducing>  
Recording Medium  
: External SCSI device  
(SCSI-2, asymmetrical transfer)  
<INSERT 7, 8>  
* Connectable SCSI device: Two (for recording  
x1, for backup x 1)  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
: 10k or higher  
: -10dBV  
Load Impedance  
: Internal E-IDE type 2.5 inch  
hard disk (optional)  
Reference Output Level  
Input Impedance  
: 10k or higher  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
<Recording Format>  
: FDMS-3*  
(* Fostex Disk Management System-3)  
<AUX SEND 1, 2>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
: 10k or higher  
: -10dBV  
<Recording Mode>  
Load Impedance  
Normal Mode  
: 8 Real track + 16 Additional  
track (Sampling Rate: 44.1kHz/  
A.D.A.C.*)  
Reference Output Level  
<AUX RTN 1 L/R, 2 L/R>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 4)  
Mastering Mode  
: 8 Real track + 16 Additional  
track (Sampling Rate: 44.1kHz/  
16-bit linear)  
Input Impedance  
: 8k or higher  
Reference Input Level : -20dBV  
<STEREO OUT L/R>  
<A/D>  
: 20-bit 64 times over sampling,  
delta sigma modulation type  
Connector  
: RCA pin jack (x 2)  
Load Impedance  
Reference Output Level  
: 10k or higher  
: -10dBV  
<D/A>  
: 20-bit 128 times over  
sampling, delta sigma  
modulation type  
<MONITOR OUT L/R>  
Connector  
:
6mm Phone jack (x 2)  
: 10k or higher  
: -10dBV  
Load Impedance  
<Digital Input/Output>  
<Save/Load>  
: 44.1kHz/16-bit linear  
Reference Output Level  
: Mastering Mode: FDIO-1*  
(DAT, adat)  
<PHONES OUT>  
Connector  
:
6mm Stereo Phone jack  
: 16 or higher  
: Normal Mode: SCSI  
Load Impedance  
Maximum output  
(* Fostex Data Input /Output-)1  
: 50mW (at 50  
)
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance/Specifications  
<Tracks for simultaneous recording>  
: 8 tracks (via optical adat)  
: 2 tracks (via analog)  
<Power supply>  
: AC 120V, 60Hz  
: AC 230V ~ , 50/60Hz  
: 15W  
<Power Consumption>  
<Tracks for simultaneous playback>  
* Specifications and appearance are subject to change  
without notice for product improvement.  
: 8 tracks  
<Program No.>  
<Vari pitch.>  
<Crossfade>  
: Maximum 99 tunes  
: +/-6%  
*A.D.A.C. (Advanced Digital Audio Acoustic Coding)  
A.D.A.C. isthenextgenerationdigitalaudiocodingtechnique  
maximized for multitrack recording which have been  
developed by joint research of Matsushita Electric Industry  
Corporation and Fostex Corporation.  
: 10msec.  
<Recording/reproducing frequency>  
: 20Hz ~ 20kHz (typical)  
<Dynamic Range>  
: 90dB (typical)  
* “Adat” and the “Adat symbol” are trademarks of Alesis  
Corporation.  
<Total harmonic distortion>  
: 0.008% (at mastering  
mode)  
<Tempo map>  
Signature  
: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8,  
5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8  
Tempo  
: quarter note (1/4 note) = 30 ~ 250  
* Input/Output  
<RECORDER IN>  
Connector  
: RCA pin jack (x2)  
Input Impedance  
: 20k or higher  
Reference Input Level : -10dBV  
<DATA IN/OUT>  
Connector  
Format  
: Optical (x2)  
: (1) IEC958 Part 3 (S/P DIF), (2)  
Alesis Proprietry Multi Channel  
Optical Interface (Adat Optical)  
* Switch to either (1) or (2) depending on setup.  
<MIDI IN/OUT>  
Connector  
Format  
: DIN 5 PIN (x2)  
: MIDI  
<PUNCH IN/OUT>  
Connector  
:
6mm phone jack (x1)  
* For using optional Model 8051 foot switch)  
<SCSI>  
Connector  
Protocol  
: D-SUB 25 PIN (x1)  
: SCSI-2, unbalanced  
transmission line  
Type of transmission : Asynchronous transmission  
Connectable number of units : 2  
SCSI-ID  
: Automatic recognition  
* General  
<Dimensions (mm)>  
: 552 (W) x 110 (H) x 355 (D)  
* Including highest protrusion.  
<Weight>  
: Approx. 5kg  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance/Specifications  
Block Diagram  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Foot switch...........................................................45  
Previewfunction.................................................74  
Preroll time..........................................43, 70, 102  
[A]  
AUX SEND knob..............................................8, 50  
AUX RTN knob................................................8, 50  
ACCESS LED.........................................................10  
AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY key......................12, 70  
AUTO RTN START key.................13, 66, 70, 74  
AUTO RTN END key.....................14, 66, 70, 74  
AUTO PUNCH IN key...................14, 41, 66, 74  
AUTO PUNCH OUT key...............14, 41, 66, 74  
AUX SEND jack.............................................16, 50  
AUX RTN jack...............................................16, 50  
“Acc Error” message..........................................20  
ABS time...............................................................21  
Additional track...........................................24, 61  
Audio file..............................................................27  
A.D.A.C........................................................28, 117  
Auto punch in/out......................................41-44  
Auto play..............................................................70  
Auto return..........................................................71  
Autorepeat..........................................................72  
[H]  
[R]  
HOLD/> key...........................................12, 33, 66  
REC TRACK select switch.....................................9  
REWIND button............................................10, 63  
REC END locate....................................................11  
RECORD button............................................11, 41  
RECORDER IN jack.......................................16, 54  
“Rec + Yes!” message..........................................20  
Recording method.............................................22  
REMAIN..........................................................19, 22  
Real track.......................................................24, 61  
Recording mode.................................................28  
Review function...........................................63, 65  
Recprotect.........................................................107  
Resolution mode..............................................111  
[I]  
Input fader.............................................................7  
INPUTSELswitch...................................................7  
INPUTjack............................................................15  
INSERT jack...................................................16, 38  
Input monitor...............................................25, 43  
“IDE” message..............................................18, 31  
“Ins. Disk !” message..........................................96  
“Illegal FM” message...................................29, 96  
[J]  
JOG dial...............................10, 64-65, 68-69, 76  
[L]  
[S]  
LEVEL switch...................................................8, 39  
LOCATE key...........................................12, 69, 70  
Locate ABS 0.................................................11, 70  
Locate Rec End.............................................11, 70  
“Load Err” message............................................20  
Locate point.........................................................66  
Locate function...................................................70  
Loading song data..............................................85  
SCRUBkey........................................................9, 64  
SETUP key............................................................10  
STOP button...........................................11, 45, 70  
SHIFT key.................................11, 43, 65, 69, 74  
STORE key.......................................13, 33, 66, 70  
STEREOOUTjack................................................15  
SCSIconnector..............................................17, 85  
Shiftfunction.......................................................14  
“Select Trk” message.........................................20  
Stereobus.............................................................26  
“SCSI” message.............................................18, 29  
Setting digital input track........................48, 109  
Setting digital output track.....................49, 110  
Shuttle function..................................................65  
Storing a locate point.........................................66  
Slave mode...........................................81, 83, 106  
Sync system in slave mode...............................81  
Sync system with adat.......................................83  
Slavetype...........................................................107  
Saving song data.................................................85  
SETUP mode........................................................97  
[B]  
BAR/BEAT/CLK...................................................21  
Backupmode.......................................................28  
Backup drive.................................................28, 87  
“Backup Dsk” message......................................32  
[C]  
[M]  
Contrast adjustment knob..................................9  
Clipboardplay..............................................11, 57  
CLIPBOARD IN key........................14, 56, 66, 74  
CLIPBOARD OUT key....................14, 56, 66, 74  
Current drive................................................28, 87  
Creating a new program...................................33  
Copy&Paste........................................................56  
Copy clip..............................................................57  
Copy start/end point.........................................57  
Cue function.................................................63, 65  
MON knob..............................................................8  
MONMASTERknob..............................................8  
Master fader...........................................................8  
Monitor select switch...........................................8  
MONOUTjack.....................................................15  
MIDI IN/OUT jack........................................16, 76  
MTC time..............................................................21  
Masteringmode..................................................28  
Metronome function................................38, 101  
Manual punch in/out.................................45-47  
Move & Paste.......................................................56  
Move clip..............................................................57  
Move start/end point........................................57  
MIDI sync function.............................................77  
“Master FM” message........................................32  
MIDI sync signal...............................................103  
MTC frame rate................................................104  
MTC offset time................................................104  
MTC offset mode..............................................105  
Mixdown.................................................50, 78, 80  
[D]  
DISP SEL key.................................................10, 17  
DATA IN/OUT jack......................................17, 48  
Display...........................................................................17  
Deleting a program............................................35  
Digitalrecording.................................................48  
Digital and analog  
simultaneous recording............................52  
Digitalmixdown...........................................50, 54  
Digital scrubbing................................................64  
Directlocate.........................................................70  
Digital input track.....................................48, 109  
Digital output track............................48, 78, 110  
Device ID number............................................112  
[T]  
“Track Over” message.......................................20  
Time base......................................................18, 21  
Track exchange............................................24, 61  
Trimming the locate point (edit point)..........75  
Time signature....................................................98  
Tempo.....................................................................100  
[U]  
[N]  
UNDO/REDOkey................................................13  
“Un Format !” message......................................20  
Undo/Redo function.....................44, 47, 58, 60  
Normal mode......................................................28  
“NomalFM”message.........................................32  
[O]  
[V]  
[E]  
“Over !” message.................................................20  
VARIPITCHkey...................................................12  
“Void Data” message.........................................20  
“Void Out !” message.........................................20  
Vari pitch function.............................................37  
Equalizercontrolknb...........................................8  
EXECUTE/YESkey...............................................10  
EXIT/NO key........................................................10  
EDIT key..........................................13, 56, 59, 61  
Event............................................................27, 112  
Editing a program title......................................36  
Erase............................................................................59  
Erasestart/endpoint.........................................59  
Editpoint..............................................................66  
[P]  
PLAY button...........................................11, 47, 57  
PHONES jack........................................................15  
Preset display......................................................18  
PUNCHIN/OUTjack....................................16, 45  
Panpot knob....................................................7, 26  
“Protected” message..........................................20  
Program change...........................................23, 34  
Playback monitor...............................................25  
Program title.................................................33, 36  
Punch in/out.......................................................41  
[W]  
Warning message...............................................20  
“Wrong Disk” message......................................96  
[F]  
Formattingadisk................................................28  
F FWD button...............................................10, 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOSTEX CORPORATION  
3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo 196-0021, Japan  
FOSTEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.  
C
PRINTED IN JAPAN OCT. 1998 8288 419 100 FX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<List of SCSI drive and media checked for function  
(as of Aug. 1998)>  
<SCSI drive and media checked for function>  
“The SCSI drive and media checked for function” are products that have been selected from the Fostex recommended list.  
They have been connected to an FD-8 and their correct operation confirmed. However, in some cases, there is a subtle  
difference in performance from unit to unit, even in the same model from the same manufacturer, and therefore, this is not a  
guarantee of the performance of all recommended products on the list. This is also not a evaluation of the SCSI drive and  
their performance. The FD-8 has three types of “Recording Mode” and there is a limit to the equipment which can be used  
(Refer to the owner’s manual, the quick operation guide and this additional Edition in regards to the recording mode.).  
<Drive and media possible in record/playback when connecting to the FD-8>  
Recording mode of the FD-8  
Maker/Drive name  
Disk Capacity  
Normal mode  
Mastering mode  
Iomega zip  
SyQuest ezflyer  
100 MB  
X
X
X
(Approx. 67 minutes)  
(Approx. 156 minutes)  
*1  
230 MB  
640/540/230 MB  
MO drive related  
-
-
2.5 inch internal IDE hard disk *3  
External fixed SCSI hard disk *4  
Time in ( ) is approximate mono track recording time.  
(*1): Record/playback time will differ depending on the capacity of the disk used (640/540/230 MB).  
The drive and media which can be used are as follows (The time in the following is the approximate mono track recording time).  
Recording time  
Normal mode  
Maker name  
FUJITSU  
Drive  
Media type  
M2513A/M2513E  
M2513D/M2512A  
(Approx. 437/368/156 minutes)  
640/540/230 MB  
230 MB  
(Approx. 156 minutes)  
(Approx. 437/368/156 minutes)  
(Approx. 156 minutes)  
640/540/230 MB  
230 MB  
MOS350/MOS341 series  
MOS332 series  
OLYMPUS  
(*2):Recording time could be shorter than the time written in above chart, depending on the drive used.  
Therefore, the recording time should be checked after formatting, and then checking the REMAIN display.  
(*3): The 2.5 inch IDE hard disk will be installed by our service department (The customer cannot do the installation).  
If a 2.5 inch IDE hard disk has been installed, we recommended that you read the following items.  
(*4):Record/playback time depends on the drive memory capacity.  
<To customers with a 2.5 inch internal IDE hard disk installed>  
Please note the following if a 2.5 inch hard disk has been installed.  
* The 2.5 inch IDE hard disk will be formatted in “Mastering mode” before delivery to the customer.  
Therefore, the customer need not format it. If the internal hard disk must be reformatted, be sure to do it correctly after  
referring to “Reformatting the disk” in the owner’s manual. When formatting, be careful to note the following.  
* When the power is switched on to an FD-8 with a 2.5 inch hard disk installed, the display will indicate as shown below at lower  
left. This indicates that the media which can be used is the internal hard disk [IDE], and will be lit as shown below.  
However, even though a 2.5 inch hard disk is installed, if an external SCSI drive (current drive) is connected, it will be given  
priority automatically and [SCSI] will be shown in the display (lower right indication).  
Therefore, when both an external SCSI drive (current drive) and an internal hard disk are used, the external SCSI drive should  
not be connected to the SCSI connector if the internal hard disk is to be used to record/playback or when it is to be formatted.  
44.1kHz  
44.1kHz  
ABS  
ABS  
M
S
F
M
S
F
PGM  
SCSI  
PGM  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
SYNC OUT  
CLK  
DRIVE  
IDE  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
AUTO  
A.PUNCH  
DRIVE  
DRIVE  
[IDE] will light when the internal IDE  
hard disk is the current drive.  
[SCSI] will light when the external  
SCSI drive is the current drive.  
IDE  
SCSI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Dyson Washer CRO2 User Manual
Eagle Electronics Marine Radio EHR 10 User Manual
Escort Radar Detector 9500i User Manual
Euro Pro Convection Oven TO289N2 User Manual
Franke Consumer Products Ventilation Hood FCH 906 XS ECS User Manual
Galil Projector DMC 2X00 User Manual
Gateway Laptop EC18T User Manual
GE Clothes Dryer DCCB330EG User Manual
GE Ice Maker WR49X10180 User Manual
Global Machinery Company Saw LS236LS User Manual